DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY
OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, MEDIA AND
WARRANTY BOOKLET BY VISITING:
WWW.MOPAR.COM/EN-US/CARE/OWNERS-MANUAL.HTML
(U.S. RESIDENTS);
WWW.OWNERS.MOPAR.CA (CANADIAN RESIDENTS).
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
Whether it’s providing information about specific
product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment,
we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your
Dodge brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your
make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search
keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special offers
tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and more. To get this information,
just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and
print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA
US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.dodge.com/en/owners
(U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on
the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the
www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the
applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
©2018 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC.
APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC.
GOOGLE PLAY STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GOOGLE.
19RT-926-AA
SECOND EDITION
2019 GRAND CARAVAN USER GUIDE
3466448_19b_Grand_Caravan_UG_072318.indd 1 7/23/18 11:19 AM
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road
highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in
a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
IMPORTANT
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area
of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the
applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
This guide has been prepared to help you
get quickly acquainted with your new Dodge
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference for common questions. However, it
is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions,
maintenance procedures and important
safety messages, please consult your
Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the
back cover and other Warning Labels in
your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may
apply to your vehicle. For additional
information on accessories to help
personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Dodge brand dealer.
DRIVING AND
ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most
frequent causes of collisions. Your
driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If
you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride
with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend or use
public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a
collision. Your perceptions are less
sharp, your reflexes are slower and
your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and
then drive.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the
safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, resulting in a collision and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme
caution when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as
cellular telephones, computers, portable
radios, vehicle navigation or other devices,
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous and could lead to a serious
collision. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while
the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle. Some
states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
3466448_19b_Grand_Caravan_UG_072318.indd 2 7/23/18 11:19 AM
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents pre-
cision workmanship, distinctive styling, and
high quality.
ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
This guide illustrates and describes the opera-
tion of features and equipment that are either
standard or optional on this vehicle. This guide
may also include a description of features and
equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this guide
that are not available on this vehicle. FCA US
LLC reserves the right to make changes in de-
sign and specifications and/or make additions
to or improvements to its products without im-
posing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help you
quickly become acquainted with the important
features of your vehicle. It contains most things
you will need to operate and maintain the ve-
hicle, including emergency information.
When it comes to service, remember that your
authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has
factory-trained technicians and genuine
MOPAR
®
parts, and cares about your satisfac-
tion.
HOW TO FIND YOUR
OWNER’S MANUAL ONLINE
This publication has been prepared as a refer-
ence item to help you quickly become ac-
quainted with the most important features and
processes of your vehicle. It contains most
things you will need to operate and maintain the
vehicle, including emergency information and
procedures.
This User Guide is not a replacement for the full
Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every
operation and procedure possible with your ve-
hicle.
For more detailed descriptions of the topics
discussed in this User Guide, as well as infor -
mation covering features and processes not cov-
ered in this User Guide, the full vehicle Owner’s
Manual can be accessed for free online in a
printer -friendly PDF format.
To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable
supplement for your vehicle, follow the appro-
priate web address below:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html
(U.S. Residents)
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)
FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our
environment and natural resources. By convert-
ing from paper to electronic delivery for the
majority of the user information for your vehicle,
together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-
based products and lessen the stress on our
environment.
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Each time direction instructions (left/right or
forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are
given, these must be intended as regarding an
occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not
complying with this rule will be properly speci-
fied in the text.
The figures in this User Guide are provided by
way of example only: this might imply that some
details of the image do not correspond to the
actual arrangement of your vehicle.
In addition, the User Guide has been conceived
considering vehicles with the steering wheel on
the left side; it is therefore possible that in
vehicles with the steering wheel on the right
side, the position or construction of some con-
trols is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the
figure.
To identify the chapter with the information
needed you can consult the index at the end of
this User Guide.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi-
cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd
page. A few pages further there is a key for
getting to know the chapter order and the rel-
evant symbols in the tabs. There is always a
textual indication of the current chapter at the
side of each even page.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels
whose symbols indicate precautions to be ob-
served when using this component. Refer to
“W arning Lights and Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
While reading this User Guide you will find a
series of W ARNINGS to be followed to prevent
incorrect use of components which could cause
accidents or injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS that must be followed
to prevent against procedures that could result
in damage to your vehicle.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
2
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
HOW TO FIND YOUR OWNER’S MANUAL ONLINE ....1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...............2
Essential Information .................2
Symbols ........................2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL ...................7
INTERIOR .........................8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ...........................9
Key Fobs ........................9
IGNITIONSWITCH ....................10
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped . . 10
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ............10
How To Use Remote Start .............10
To Enter Remote Start Mode ............11
General Information ................11
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .....11
To Arm The System .................11
To Disarm The System ...............12
Tamper Alert .....................12
DOORS ..........................12
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped .....12
Child Locks .....................13
SEATS ..........................13
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) .........14
Heated Seats ....................16
HEAD RESTRAINTS ...................18
Supplemental Active Head Restraints —
Front Seats ......................18
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats . . . 20
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench .....20
Head Restraints — Third Row ...........20
STEERING WHEEL ...................21
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .........21
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ......21
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ....................22
Headlight Switch ..................22
Multifunction Lever .................23
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . 23
High/Low Beam Switch ...............23
Flash-To-Pass ....................23
Automatic Headlights ................23
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped ....24
Headlight Delay — If Equipped ..........24
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ..........24
Turn Signals .....................24
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS .........25
Windshield Wiper Operation ............25
Rear Wiper And Washer ...............25
CLIMATE CONTROLS ..................26
Automatic Climate Control Overview .......26
Climate Control Functions .............34
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .....................34
Operating Tips ...................35
WINDOWS ........................36
Power Windows ...................36
HOOD ..........................37
Opening The Hood .................37
Closing The Hood ..................38
LIFTGATE .........................38
Opening .......................38
Closing ........................38
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ...........39
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .......39
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED .......39
Before Y ou Begin Programming HomeLink ....40
Programming A Rolling Code ............41
Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........41
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......42
Using HomeLink ..................43
Security .......................43
Troubleshooting Tips ................43
General Information .................44
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT .................44
Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped .....44
Power Inverter — If Equipped ...........46
Smoker's Package Kit — If Equipped ......47
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........48
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls .......................48
Oil Life Reset ....................49
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .....49
Instrument Cluster Display— If Equipped ....49
Key Fob Programmable Features .........50
TRIP COMPUTER ....................51
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..........51
Red W arning Lights .................51
Y ellow Warning Lights ................54
White Indicator Lights ...............57
Green Indicator Lights ...............57
Blue Indicator Lights ................57
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ......57
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ....................58
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4
SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .............59
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . 59
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .......61
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...........65
Occupant Restraint Systems Features .......65
Important Safety Precautions ...........65
Seat Belt Systems .................66
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ......77
Child Restraints ...................86
Transporting Pets .................104
SAFETY TIPS .....................105
Transporting Passengers .............105
Exhaust Gas ....................105
Safety Checks Y ou Should Make Inside
The V ehicle ....................105
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The V ehicle ................107
STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......108
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .............108
Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode ...........109
Gear Ranges ....................110
SPEED CONTROL ....................111
To Activate .....................112
To Set A Desired Speed ..............112
To Resume Speed .................112
To Deactivate ....................112
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . 112
ParkSense Sensors ................112
ParkSense W arning Display ............113
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense ..........113
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ......113
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .........114
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...............116
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ..........116
Materials Added To Fuel .............117
TRAILER TOWING ...................117
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
W eight Ratings) ..................117
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME,
ETC.) ..........................118
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . 118
Recreational Towing — All Models ........119
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............120
BULB REPLACEMENT .................120
Replacement Bulbs ................120
FUSES ..........................121
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ....122
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ............125
Jack Location ...................126
Spare Tire Tools ..................126
To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut ......126
Spare Tire Removal ................128
Spare Tire Removal Instructions .........128
Preparations For Jacking .............129
Jacking Instructions ................130
Securing The Compact Spare Tire ........133
Road Tire Installation ...............134
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........135
JUMP STARTING ....................140
Preparations For Jump Start ...........140
Jump Starting Procedure .............141
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............142
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............143
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............143
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............145
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) . 146
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............146
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................147
Maintenance Plan .................148
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...............151
Engine Compartment — 3.6L ..........151
RAISING THE VEHICLE .................152
TIRES ..........................152
Tire Safety Information ..............152
Tires — General Information ...........160
Tire Types ......................164
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............165
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...........167
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...........168
Treadwear ......................168
Traction Grades ..................169
Temperature Grades ................169
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ....170
Torque Specifications ...............170
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) .........170
E-85 General Information .............170
FLUID CAPACITIES ...................171
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...............171
Engine .......................171
Chassis .......................172
MOPAR ACCESSORIES .................173
Authentic Accessories By Mopar .........173
5
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY ....................175
UCONNECT 430/430N .................176
Clock Setting ...................177
Menu ........................177
Equalizer , Balance And Fade ...........177
Radio Operation ..................179
CD/DVD Disc Operation ..............181
Audio Jack Operation ...............182
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Operation ........183
Cleaning Y our Touchscreen Radio ........185
Garmin Navigation ................185
Main Navigation Menu ..............186
Following Y our Route ...............187
TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL INFORMATION . . . 188
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..........188
Reception Conditions ...............188
Care And Maintenance ..............188
Anti-Theft Protection ...............188
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL ...............189
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) .......189
System Operation .................189
Operation Of The Touchscreen Radio/DVD
Player/Blu-Ray Player ...............190
Operation Of The Remote Control ........190
Auxiliary Audio/Video Input Jacks ........190
UCONNECT PHONE ..................190
Phone Pairing ...................191
Phonebook .....................192
Making A Phone Call ...............192
Receiving A Call — Accept (And End) ......192
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call . . . 192
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And
V ehicle .......................192
Changing The V olume ...............192
General Information ................193
UCONNECT VOICE COMMAND ............193
V oice Command Operation ............193
V oice Text Reply ..................196
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............197
FCA US LLC Customer Center ..........197
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ........197
In Mexico Contact .................197
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ......197
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ...........198
Service Contract ..................198
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............199
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .........................199
In Canada .....................199
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............199
INDEX
..........................201
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Headlight Switch 7 — Gear Selector
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 8 — Uconnect System
3 — Multifunction Lever (Behind Steering Wheel) 9 — Climate Controls
4 — Instrument Cluster 10 — Switch Panel
5 — Speed Controls 11 — Upper Glove Compartment
6 — Ignition 12 — Lower Glove Compartment
7
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Door Handles 4 — Parking Brake
2 — Door Locks 5 — Seats
3 — Window Switches 6 — Power Outlets
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
8
KEYS
Key Fobs
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This
system consists of a Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) key fob and a W ireless Ignition Node
(WIN) with integral ignition. Y ou can insert the
key fob into the ignition switch with either side
up. It also contains an emergency key , which
stores in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’ s
wireless signal.
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the
key fob go dead. Y ou can keep the emergency
key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the me-
chanical latch at the top of the key fob sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with
your other hand.
NOTE:
When using the emergency key to gain access to
your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm
may be triggered. Insert the key into the ignition
and place the ignition in the ON/RUN mode to
disarm the security system.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the doors. Push and release
the unlock button a second time within 5 sec-
onds to unlock the liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
once to lock the doors. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the lock signal.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WIN Key Fob With Integrated Key
1 — Lock
2 — Unlock
3 — Remote Start
4 — Emergency Key Release
5 — Emergency Key
9
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’ s authority to operate the
equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) —
If Equipped
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has four operat-
ing positions, three with detents and one that is
spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF,
ACC, and ON/RUN. The ST AR T position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the
switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN
position.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive
(brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• System not disabled from previous remote
start event
• V ehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas con-
tains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odor-
less and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
Wireless Ignition Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
10
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The ve-
hicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash
twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Then the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is dis-
abled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key fob.
However, the ignition must be placed in the
ON/RUN position before you can repeat the
start sequence for a third cycle.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’ s authority to operate the
equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition
switch for unauthorized operation. When the
alarm is activated, the interior switches for door
locks, power sliding doors and power liftgate are
disabled. The vehicle security alarm provides
both audible and visible signals. If something
triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm
will provide the following audible and visible
signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle
security light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’ s ignition is cycled to
the “OFF” position (refer to "Starting The
Engine" in "Starting And Operating" in the
Owner’s Manual for further information).
11
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the
OFF position. Insert a valid key into the igni-
tion switch and turn the key to the ON
position.
NOTE:
• The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the lift-
gate button will not disarm the vehicle secu-
rity alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not un-
lock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create condi-
tions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle se-
curity alarm will remain armed when the battery
is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and
the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security
alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three
times and the exterior lights will blink three
times when you disarm the vehicle security
alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
DOORS
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
Push the button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open, close, or reverse a power
sliding door.
The power sliding door may be power opened or
closed in several ways:
• Key fob
• Inside or outside handles
• Buttons located:
– In the overhead console
– Just inside the sliding door
– On the outside handle
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
12
Push the button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open a power sliding door. When the
door is fully open, pushing the button twice within
five seconds a second time will close the door.
There are power sliding side door switches lo-
cated on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of
the power sliding door for the rear seat passen-
gers and in the overhead console for the driver
and passengers. Pushing the switch once will
open the power sliding door . If the switch is
pushed while the door is under a power cycle,
the door will reverse direction.
NOTE:
The power sliding side door must be unlocked
before the power sliding door switches will op-
erate.
If the inside or outside door handles are used
while the power sliding side door is activated,
the power sliding door feature will be canceled
and will go into manual mode.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power
sliding doors from the rear seats, push the
power sliding door master lock button, located
in the overhead console, to disable the switches
and handles for the rear seat passengers.
NOTE:
• The power sliding side door switches will not
open the power sliding door if the gear selector
is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h). To close the power sliding door with
the gear selector in gear and vehicle speed at
0 mph (0 km/h), the brake must be pushed.
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side
door while it is closing or opening, the door
will automatically reverse to the closed or
open position, provided it meets sufficient
resistance.
• If the power sliding side door is not in the full
open or close position, it will fully open when
a power sliding door switch is pushed. To close
the door , wait until it is fully open and then
push the switch again.
• If the power sliding door encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the sys-
tem will automatically stop, the power sliding
door motor will make a clicking sound until
the door has no further movement. This click-
ing sound can be stopped by pulling the inside
or outside handle. If this condition occurs, no
damage is done to the power sliding door
motor. The power sliding door must be opened
or closed manually.
WARNING!
You, or others, could be injured if caught in
the path of the sliding door . Make sure the
door path is clear before closing the door.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small chil-
dren riding in the rear seats, the sliding doors
are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock
system.
NOTE:
When the Child Protection Door Lock System is
engaged, the door can only be opened by using
the outside door handle even though the inside
lock is in the unlocked position.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
13
WARNING!
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
Stow 'n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating,
the second and third row seats can be folded
into the floor for convenient storage.
Second Row Stow 'n Go
On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seats, the
seats will fold and tumble in one motion.
1. Move the front seat fully forward.
2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.
3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.
NOTE:
Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless
the armrests are raised.
4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to
the “lock” position and then pull up on the
storage bin latch to open the cover.
5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever
located on the outboard side of the seat.
The non-adjustable head restraint and seat-
back will fold automatically during the seat
tumble. No additional actuation is neces-
sary.
The seat will automatically tumble into po-
sition for easy storage.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the
seats are left folded for an extended period
of time. This is normal and by simply open-
ing the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion will return to its normal
shape.
6. Push the seat into the storage bin.
7. Close the storage bin cover .
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched:
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage
bin covers open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie
down.
CAUTION!
• The storage bin cover must be locked and
flat to avoid damage from contact with the
front seat tracks, which have minimal
clearance to the cover.
• Do not sit on the second row seat when it is
in the stowed position with the seatback
upright otherwise damage to the seat may
occur.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
14
To Unstow Second Row Seats
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the
cover.
2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat rearward to
latch the seat anchors.
3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.
4. Return the head restraint to its upright posi-
tion, close the storage bin cover and slide the
storage bin locking mechanism to the “un-
locked” position.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure the seats are fully latched.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in
its lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
Stow 'n Go Seat — Folded And Latched
Position
To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and
latched position: return the seatback and head
restraint to the upright position. Then pull up on
the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side
of the seat to fold head rest, seatback, and
tumble the seat forward.
1. Return the seatback to the upright position.
2. Return the head restraint to the upright
position.
3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the
outboard side of the seat to fold head rest,
seatback, and tumble the seat forward.
Easy Entry Second Row
The second row Stow 'n Go seats allow easy
entry to the third row seat or rear cargo area.
Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the
outboard side of the seat.
The seat will automatically fold into position for
easy entry into the third row.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be
injured if the seat is not fully latched.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor ,
it is removable for added cargo space.
Release levers are located on the rear leg assem-
blies, near the floor . To remove the seat,
squeeze each release handle and rotate down-
wards to deploy the wheels. A lock indicator
button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The
seat assembly can now be removed from the
vehicle and moved on its Easy Out Rollers.
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the
detent positions on the floor. Squeeze the re-
lease handle and rotate upward until the lock
indicator button returns into the handle.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could be-
come loose. Personal injuries could result.
After reinstalling these seats, be sure the red
15
WARNING!
indicator button on the release handles re-
turn into the handles.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats —
If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the
seatback by pushing the button on the guide
and pushing the head restraint down.
2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pull-
ing on the release strap marked “1” located
on the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Pull release strap marked “2” located on the
rear of the seat to lower the seatback.
4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the
anchors.
5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble
the seat rearward into the storage bin.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out
of the storage bin and push the seat forward
until the anchors latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the
recliner.
3. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to
return to its full upright position.
4. Raise the head restraint to its upright
position.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure the seats are fully latched.
WARNING!
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in
its lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
Tailgate Mode
1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release
strap “4” to rotate the entire seat rearward.
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift
up on the seatback and push forward until
the anchors latch.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, never oper -
ate the vehicle with occupants in the third
row seat while in the tailgate mode.
Heated Seats
On some models, the front seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cush-
ions and seat backs.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
16
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-
cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause se-
rious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow
the driver and passenger to operate the seats
independently. The controls for each heater are
located on the switch bank below the climate
controls.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat set-
tings. Amber indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none
for OFF.
• Push the heated seat button
once to turn
the HI setting on.
• Push the heated seat button
a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
• Push the heated seat button
a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approxi-
mately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HI to LO,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
turn off automatically after approximately 45
minutes.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated seats can be programmed to come
on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Y our In-
strument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for
further details.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-
cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause se-
rious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
17
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’ s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints —
Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment
cannot be readily identified by any markings,
only through visual inspection of the head re-
straint. The Active Head Restraints (AHR) will
be split in two halves, with the front half being
soft foam and trim, the back half being decora-
tive plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to minimize the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occu-
pant Restraints” in “Safety” in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of
the head restraint, and push downward on the
head restraint.
Adjustment Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
18
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be
tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head
restraint closer to the back of your head, pull
forward on the bottom of the head restraint.
Push rearward on the bottom of the head re-
straint to move the head restraint away from
your head.
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If either of the head restraints require
removal, see your authorized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head
Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Safety” in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
WARNING!
• ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants.
•
All occupants, including the driver , should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury
or death.
•
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a hand,
foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental de-
ployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure
that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could
contact the Active Head Restraint during sud-
den stops. Failure to follow this warning could
cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
straint is deployed.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
19
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats
The head restraints on the second row quad
seats are non-adjustable and non-removable.
The head restraint will automatically fold for-
ward when the seat release lever is pulled dur-
ing the Stow n’ Go procedure. Refer to “Seats”
in this section for further information.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
The second row bench seat is equipped with
adjustable head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of
the head restraint, and push downward.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback
angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove
the head restraint. To reinstall the head re-
straint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head re-
straints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE:
For child restraint tethering, refer to “Occupant
Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further infor -
mation.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually
folded forward for improved rearward visibility .
They are non-removable. Pull the release strap
to fold them forward.
NOTE:
• The head restraints must be raised manually
when occupying the third row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in
the third row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be
raised and lowered for tether routing or height
adjustment. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-
tems” in “Safety” for further information.
NOTE:
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as
far as it can go. Then, push both the release
button and the adjustment button at the base of
each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head re-
straint posts into the holes and push downward.
Then, using the adjustment button, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
20
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for
further information.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering col-
umn upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steer -
ing wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering wheel out-
ward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever up-
ward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose con-
trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warn-
ing may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The
heated steering wheel has only one temperature
setting. Once the heated steering wheel has
been turned on it can operate for an average of
80 minutes before automatically shutting off.
This time may vary depending on the tempera-
ture of the environment. The heated steering
wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when
the steering wheel is already warm.
Raised Head Restraint
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
21
The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center of the instrument panel
below the climate controls.
• Push the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
• Push the heated steering wheel button
a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programed to
come on during a remote start. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’ s Manual for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-
cation, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions must exercise care
WARNING!
when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low tempera-
tures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such as
a blanket or steering wheel covers of any
type and material. This may cause the
steering wheel heater to overheat.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. The switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, in-
strument panel lights, interior lights and the fog
lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
first detent for parking light and instrument
panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight, park-
ing light and instrument panel operation.
Headlight Switch
1 — AUTO
2 — Push Fog Light
3 — Rotate Ambient/Halo Light Dimmer
4 — Rotate Instrument Panel Dimmer
5 — Rotate Headlight Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
22
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate
when the engine is started and the transmission
is in any gear except PARK. This provides a
constant "lights on" condition until the ignition
is turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than
half of normal intensity. If the parking brake is
applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will
turn off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the
DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle may
turn off for the duration of the turn signal acti-
vation. Once the turn signal is no longer active,
the DRL lamp will illuminate.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instru-
ment panel to switch the headlights to high
beams. Pulling the multifunction lever back
toward the steering wheel will return the lights
to low beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your head-
lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever
toward you. This will cause the high beam head-
lights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever
is released.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When
the system is on, the headlight time delay fea-
ture is also on. This means the headlights will
stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. The headlight
time delay can be programmed 0/30/60/
90 seconds. Refer to “Headlight Delay” in this
section for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Multifunction Lever
1 — Mist (Push To First Detent)
2 — Rear Wiper/Washer
3 — Push Lever For High Beams
4 — Front Wipers
5 — Front W asher
(Push To Second Detent)
23
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode
and the engine is running, the headlights will
automatically turn on when the wiper system is
also turned on. Headlights on when windshield
wipers are on may be found on vehicles
equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NOTE:
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off through the instrument cluster
display — if equipped. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your In-
strument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for
further information.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting
your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the
ignition switch while the headlights are still on.
Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds.
The 90 second delay interval begins when the
headlight switch is turned off. If the headlights
or parking lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be
cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose
to have the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or
90 seconds or not remain on. To change the
timer setting, see an authorized dealer.
The headlight delay time is programmable on
vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in
your Owner’s Manual for further information.
If the headlights are turned off before the igni-
tion, they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The headlights must be turned off within
45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to acti-
vate this feature.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push in the headlight switch control knob.
Pushing the headlight switch control knob in a
second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument clus-
ter display will flash to show proper operation of
the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to
light when the lever is moved, it would suggest
that the indicator bulb is defective.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle
has traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about
1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a
chime will sound to alert the driver.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
24
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a
switch within the multifunction lever . Rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to select the
desired wiper speed.
NOTE:
Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
vents the windshield wiper blades from return-
ing to the off position. If the windshield wiper
switch is turned off and the blades cannot
return to the off position, damage to the wiper
motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
shield could lead to a collision. Y ou might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid
sudden icing of the windshield during freez-
ing weather , warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward
to the second detent past the intermittent settings
for high-speed wiper operation.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable
pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end
of the multifunction lever to the first detent
position, and then turn the end of the lever to
select the desired delay interval. There are five
delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately 36 sec-
onds between cycles. The delay intervals will
double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push on the end of
the lever to the second detent and hold while spray
is desired. If the lever is pushed while on the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and
operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent inter-
val previously selected. If the lever is pushed while
the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will
operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Mist Feature
Push the end of the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) to the first detent
and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
Rear Wiper And Washer
Rotating the center ring of the wiper lever to the
first detent activates the rear intermittent wip-
ers. To activate the washers, rotate the center
ring fully forward and the washers will spray
until the ring is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval.
NOTE:
Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
wiper speed only.
25
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regu-
late the temperature, air flow , and direction of
air circulating throughout the vehicle. The con-
trols are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Automatic Temperature Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
26
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). An LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.
Automatic Operation
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will
cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section
for more information.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes
except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could
create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur .
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Rear Climate Control Button
Push Rear Climate Control Button to control rear compartment climate from the Front ATC Panel. The rear climate modes will
be displayed on the Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after ten minutes.
27
Icon Description
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button for warmer temperature
settings. Push the blue arrow button for cooler temperature settings.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you
select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.
NOTE:
Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower speeds.
Modes Control Button
Toggle the Modes Control Button to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from
the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until you see Panel Mode Icon on the display. Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air . The air vanes of the center outlets and out-
board outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
28
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until you see Bi-Level Mode Icon on the display. Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until you see Floor Mode Icon on the display. Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until you see Mix Mode Icon on the display. Air is directed through the floor , defrost, and side
window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This set-
ting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Front Defrost Mode
Front Defrost Mode Button
Push the button to select Front Defrost Mode. The indicator illuminates when this mode is on. Air comes from the windshield
and side window demist outlets. When the defrost mode is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
29
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the
rear right side of the 3rd Row seats and over-
head outlets at each outboard rear seating po-
sition. The system provides heated air through
the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are
located in the Uconnect system, located on the
instrument panel.
Icon Description
Rear Lock Button
Press to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower settings.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button to increase the temperature.
Push the down arrow button to decrease the temperature. When the SYNC feature is active, the rear temperature, the
passenger’s temperature will move up and down with the driver’s temperature.
Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
30
Icon Description
SYNC Button — If Equipped
Press the SYNC button to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled.
SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing
the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
Rear Blower Control
Turn off Blower Control Knob clockwise or counter clockwise to adjust blower speed. There are seven blower speeds.
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select in Rear Compartment.
The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.
Panel Mode
Rear Panel Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until Rear Panel Mode appears on the display . Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will
shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Rear Bi-Level Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until the Rear Bi-Level Mode appears on the display. Air comes from both the headliner
outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Rear Floor Mode
Toggle the Modes Control Button until the Rear Floor Mode appears on the display. Air comes from the floor vents.
31
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
— If Equipped
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjust-
ment of the rear climate controls from the front
ATC panel. To change the rear system settings:
• Press the "REAR" button to change control to
rear control mode, Rear display (below) will
appear. Control functions now operate rear
system.
• To return to Front screen, press the "REAR"
button again, or it will revert to the Front
screen after six seconds.
1. Adjust the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature
and the Rear Modes to suit your comfort
needs.
2.
ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
ATC System will automatically achieve and
maintain that comfort level. When the system is
set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary
to change the settings. Y ou will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the sys-
tem to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to pro-
vide comfort as quickly as possible.
Icon Description
Rear Mode Control Knob
Rotate knob to change the air distribution mode for the rear passengers to one of the following:
Panel Mode
Rear Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Rear ATC Control Features
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
32
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Rear Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Rear Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control Knob
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, turn the Temperature Control Knob. Turn it to the right to raise the
temperature, or turn it to the left to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the control head is illuminated and
any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
Push the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front ATC panel. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock icon in the rear
temperature knob.
Rear Blower Control Knob
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control Knob in the rear of the
vehicle. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
Rear AUTO Mode
Rear AUTO is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob counterclockwise to AUTO. The ATC system will automatically achieve
and maintain that comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically .
33
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air condition-
ing system is turned on, cool dehumidified air
will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For
improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually ad-
just the blower and airflow mode settings. Also,
make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level, or
Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radia-
tor), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings. Press-
ing other settings will cause the MAX A/C opera-
tion to switch to the selected setting and MAX
A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recircu-
lation feature may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the wind-
shield.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and auto-
matically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the set-
tings. Y ou will experience the greatest effi-
ciency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as
quickly as possible.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
34
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric cus-
tomer programmable feature. To provide you
with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan
will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The blower will increase in speed and transi-
tion into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
Operating Tips
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant (con-
forming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Speci-
fications” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling sys-
tem is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for proper coolant
selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended,
because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
V ehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and in-
crease the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long peri-
ods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild wash-
ing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments,
or abrasive window cleaners on the inte-
rior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake
may reduce airflow , and if they enter the ple-
num, they could plug the water drains. In winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
35
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air . Refer to an authorized
dealer for filter replacement instructions.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows
using controls located on the driver's door trim
panel.
The driver may lock out the rear power windows
by pushing the bar control just below the power
window controls.
The controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
NOTE:
Power Window controls will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch
has been turned to OFF, depending upon the
accessory delay setting. Opening a front door
will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s
door trim panel which operates the passenger
door window and a set of controls that lock and
unlock all doors. The controls will operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or
ACC position and during power accessory delay.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
The front driver and front passenger controls
may be equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift
the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto Up operation, push down on the
control briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
control to the first detent and release when you
want the window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window control again to close the window .
Window Switches
1 — Power Window Lockout Switch
2 — Rear Power Window Switches
3 — Front Power Window Switches
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
36
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the
control lightly to the first detent and hold to
close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control —
If Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the
sliding door window by a single control on the
door handle assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
NOTE:
• The controls will not operate if the driver has
activated the Power Window Lockout.
• The sliding door windows do not open fully .
They stop several inches above the window
sill.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-
tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter -type
sound in the ears. Y our vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the rear windows are open and
buffeting occurs, open the front and rear win-
dows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust
the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
HOOD
Opening The Hood
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the
instrument panel, below the steering
column.
2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look
inside the center of the hood opening. Lo-
cate, then push the safety catch downward
while raising the hood at the same time.
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the
open position.
Hood Release Lever
37
Closing The Hood
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to fol-
low this warning could result in serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
Opening
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
• Overhead console liftgate button
• Key fob
• Outside handle
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to release the liftgate.
Closing
To Close The Liftgate
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate
lowering the liftgate. Release the handle when
the liftgate takes over the closing effort.
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the
button, located in the upper left trim in the
liftgate opening. Pushing once will only close
the liftgate. This button cannot be used to open
the liftgate.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
Liftgate Handle
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
38
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in
several ways:
• Overhead console liftgate button
• Key fob
• Outside handle (opens liftgate only)
• Button just inside the liftgate on the upper left
trim (when liftgate is open)
Using the above ways:
• When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate
will open
• When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will
close
• When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will
reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the Overhead
Console to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open or close the liftgate.
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear
Interior Power Liftgate button (if equipped),
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate
opening.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide
a level-riding vehicle under most passenger and
cargo loading conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock
absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the
correct height. It takes approximately 1 mile
(1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete
depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approxi-
mately 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed
itself down. The vehicle must be driven to reset
the system.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER —
IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls
(hand-held transmitters) that operate devices
such as garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s bat-
tery.
Overhead Console Power Switches
1 — Left Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Sliding Door
4 — Sliding Door Power Off
39
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the
overhead console, headliner or sunvisor , desig-
nate the three different HomeLink channels.
The HomeLink indicator is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink is disabled when the V ehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of
the garage before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position and push and hold the two
outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up
20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink for the first
time. Do not erase channels when program-
ming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assis-
tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for infor-
mation or assistance.
HomeLink Buttons And Indicator Light
HomeLink Buttons
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
40
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were
manufactured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used
to open and close the door. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program while
keeping the HomeLink indicator light in
view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you
want to program while you push and hold the
hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator
will flash slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink has received the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter . Release
both buttons after the indicator light
changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is attached
to the garage door opener/device motor .
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or
“TRAINING” button. On some garage door
openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is
in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the
next step after the LEARN button has been
pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the pro-
grammed HomeLink button twice (holding
the button for two seconds each time). If the
garage door opener/device activates, pro-
gramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not
activate, push the button a third time (for
two seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, repeat each step for each remain-
ing button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Programming A Rolling Code” step two and
follow all remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manu-
factured before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go, place the ignition in the RUN position
with the engine ON. Make sure while pro-
gramming HomeLink with the engine ON
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or
that the garage door remains open at all
times.
41
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program while
keeping the HomeLink indicator light in
view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you
want to program while you push and hold the
hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator
will flash slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink has received the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter . Release
both buttons after the indicator light
changes from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink
button and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink
buttons, repeat each step for each re-
maining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step
two and follow all remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during
the cycling process to prevent possible over -
heating of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program while
keeping the HomeLink indicator light in
view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink
button while you push and release (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every two sec-
onds until HomeLink has successfully ac-
cepted the frequency signal. The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is pro-
grammed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
42
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink
buttons, repeat each step for each re-
maining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for
the programmed device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator , security system, entry
door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The hand-
held transmitter of the device may also be used
at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell
or turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside but-
tons for 20 seconds until the red indicator
flashes.
NOTE:
All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled
when the V ehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink, here are some of the most common
solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door
Opener hand-held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door
Opener to complete the training for a Rolling
Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming
and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or , on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monox-
ide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your
vehicle in the garage while programming
the transceiver . Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Y our motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the uni-
versal transceiver . Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free
1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
43
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’ s authority to operate the
equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped
Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located
on the lower instrument panel, below the open
storage bin. The driver -side power outlet is con-
trolled by the ignition switch and the passenger-
side power outlet is connected directly to the
battery. The driver -side power outlet will also
operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if
equipped with an optional Smoker's Package).
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 V olts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is ex-
ceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New V ehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Instrument Panel Power Outlets
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
44
One outlet in the removable floor console (if
equipped) shares a fuse with the lower outlet in
the instrument panel and is also connected to
the battery. Do not exceed a maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) shared between the lower
panel outlet and the removable floor console
outlet.
On vehicles equipped with the center stack the
power outlets are located under the retractable
cover. To access the power outlets push down on
the cover and slide it toward the instrument
panel.
There is an additional 12 Volt power outlet
located on the left rear trim panel immediately
behind the second row left passenger seat.
The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the
liftgate and the upper outlet in the instrument
panel are both controlled by the ignition switch.
Each of these outlets can support 160 Watts
(13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts
(13 Amps) for each of these outlets.
Removable Console Power Outlet
Center Stack Power Outlets
Rear Panel Power Outlet
45
The power outlets include tethered caps, la-
beled with a key or battery symbol indicating the
power source. The power outlet, located on the
lower instrument panel, is powered directly
from the battery. Items plugged into this power
outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent
the engine from starting.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type
of outlet should be inserted into any
12 V olt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause
an electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge
CAUTION!
sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not
being started (with accessories still
plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alter -
nator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of acces-
sory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
A 115 V olt, 150 W att inverter outlet converts
DC current to AC current, and is located on the
left rear trim panel immediately behind the
second row left passenger seat.
The power inverter switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
To turn on the power outlet, push the switch
once. Push the switch a second time to turn the
power outlet off.
This outlet can power cellular phones, electron-
ics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video game
consoles exceed this power limit, as will most
power tools.
Power Inverter Outlet
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
46
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter shuts
down. Once the electrical device has been re-
moved from the outlet, the inverter should au-
tomatically reset. If the power rating exceeds
approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the
inverter manually push the power inverter but-
ton off and on. To avoid overloading the circuit,
check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the recep-
tacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause
an electric shock and failure.
Smoker's Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer installed
Smoker's Package Kit, a removable ash receiver
is inserted into one of the two cupholders in the
center front instrument panel. To install the ash
receiver, align the receiver so the thumb grip on
the lid is facing rearward. Push the ash receiver
into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
upward on the ash receiver to remove for clean-
ing and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to
accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.
47
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF
position (and the key removed, for vehicles with
mechanical key), opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles or kilometers in the odometer . Y our
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’ s sys-
tems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and sub-menus. You can ac-
cess the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls
The vehicle’s instrument cluster is equipped
with an instrument cluster display, which offers
useful information to the driver. With the igni-
tion in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing
of a door will activate the instrument cluster
display for viewing, and display the total miles
or kilometers in the odometer.
The instrument cluster display menu items con-
sists of the following:
• Fuel Economy
• V ehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• V ehicle Info
• Messages
• Units
• System Setup (Personal Settings)
• Turn Menu Off
The system allows the driver to select informa-
tion by pushing the following buttons mounted
on the steering wheel:
• Up Button
Push and release the up button
to scroll upward through the
main menu items (Fuel
Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI,
Cruise, Messages, Units, System
Setup).
Instrument Cluster Display
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
48
• Down Button
Push and release the down but-
ton to scroll downward through
the main menu items.
• Right Button
The right button allows access to
information in instrument clus-
ter display submenus, selects
some feature settings, and resets
some instrument cluster display
features. The instrument cluster display
prompts the driver when the right button can
be used by displaying the right arrow graphic.
Once the right button has been selected for the
desired submenu list, follow the instrument
cluster display prompts to properly select the
desired submenu instrument cluster display
features.
• BACK Button
Push and release the BACK but-
ton to scroll back to a previous
menu or sub-menu.
Oil Life Reset
• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display for approxi-
mately ten seconds after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indica-
tor system is duty cycle based, which means
the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
• Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
• To reset the oil change indicator after perform-
ing the scheduled maintenance, refer to the
following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly ,
three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator sys-
tem did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items dis-
play in the center of the instrument cluster.
Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle
features.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get-
ting To Know Y our Instrument Panel” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
Instrument Cluster Display— If Equipped
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK. If
the transmission is out of P ARK or the vehicle
begins moving, a warning message SYSTEM
SETUP NOT A V AILABLE VEHICLE NOT IN
PARK displays when you try to select “System
Setup” from the main menu.
49
The instrument cluster display can be used to
program the following Personal Settings. Push
the right arrow button until Personal Settings
displays, then push the down arrow button to
scroll through the settings. Push the right arrow
button to change the setting.
• Select Language • Key-Off
Power Delay
• Nav-Turn By Turn • Illuminated
Approach
• Auto Lock Doors • Hill Start Assist
• Auto Unlock
Doors
• Flashers With
Sliding Door
• Remote Unlock
Sequence
• Calibrate
Compass
• Remote Start
Comfort Sys.
• Compass
V ariance
• Horn With
Remote Lock
• Park Assist -
If Equipped
• Flash Lamps
With Lock
• Automatic
High Beams -
If Equipped
• Headlamp
Off Delay
• Headlamps
With Wipers
Key Fob Programmable Features
The following features may also be programmed
by using the key fob or the ignition and driver's
door lock switch.
NOTE:
Pushing the lock button while you are inside the
vehicle will activate the vehicle security alarm.
Opening a door with the vehicle security alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push
the unlock button to deactivate the vehicle
security alarm.
Unlock On First Press
To unlock either the driver's side, or all doors, on
the first press of the unlock button:
1. Push and hold the lock button for at least
four seconds, but no longer than 10 sec-
onds. Then, push and hold the unlock but-
ton while still holding the lock button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Auto Unlock Doors On Exit
To have all of the vehicle doors unlock when any
door is opened:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all the doors,
and fasten your seat belt.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between the OFF
and ON position four times, ending in the
OFF position (do not start the engine).
3. Push the power door unlock switch to unlock
the doors. A single chime will indicate that
programming is complete.
Sound Horn With Lock
To turn the horn chirp on or off when the doors
are locked:
1. Push the lock button for at least four sec-
onds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then,
push the PANIC button while still holding
the lock button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
50
Flashing Lights With Lock
The turn signal lights flash when the doors are
locked, which can be turned on or off. To turn
this feature on or off:
1. Push and hold the unlock button and the
lock button at the same time for at least four
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until “Trip Info” is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display and push the right button. Push
and release the up or down arrow button to
highlight one of the following functions.
Trip A
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Trip B
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the
last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC
position. Elapsed time will increment when the
ignition switch is in the ON or START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Reset will only occur while a resettable function
is selected (highlighted). Push and hold the
right arrow button to clear the resettable func-
tion being displayed.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when appli-
cable. These indications are indicative and pre-
cautionary and as such must not be considered
as exhaustive and/or alternative to the informa-
tion contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in
the event of a failure indication. All active tell-
tales will display first if applicable. The system
check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some telltales are optional and may not appear .
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake func-
tions, including brake fluid level and parking
brake application. If the brake light turns on it
may indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low , or that there is a
problem with the anti-lock brake system reser -
voir.
51
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been cor -
rected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve brak-
ing capacity in the event of a failure to a portion
of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of
the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake
W arning Light, which will turn on when the
brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service per-
formed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. Y ou could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
V ehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake W arning Light will
turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake W arning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two sec-
onds. The light should then turn off unless the
parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the bat-
tery is not charging properly . If it stays on while
the engine is running, there may be a malfunc-
tion with the charging system. Contact an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the elec-
trical system or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light —
If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
52
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the
vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated en-
gine condition. If the engine coolant tempera-
ture is too high, this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound. If the tempera-
ture reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the
engine is able to cool: whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tempera-
ture reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Y our Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as
soon as possible, and contact an authorized
dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and if the driver’ s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
53
— Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer tow-
ing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster , with the
transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature W arning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to
boil over , come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature W arning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission dam-
age or transmission failure.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until
the vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required
as soon as possible. However , the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally ,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also
on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Active Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Elec-
tronic Stability Control system is Active. The
“ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster
will come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when
ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
54
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
1.85 gal (7 L) this warning light will turn on, and
remain on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
W arning.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
— Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and auto-
matic transmission control systems. This warn-
ing light will illuminate when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the
bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be ser -
viced by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as ref-
erenced above, can reach higher tempera-
tures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or
park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could re-
sult in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to
the vehicle control system. It also could af-
fect fuel economy and driveability . If the MIL
is flashing, severe catalytic converter dam-
age and power loss will soon occur. Immedi-
ate service is required.
55
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that
slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your ve-
hicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under -inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability .
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly . The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re-
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the origi-
nal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres-
sures and warning have been established for
the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Unde-
sirable system operation or sensor damage
may result when using replacement equip-
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
56
CAUTION!
ment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire seal-
ants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper -
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it
is recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
White Indicator Lights
— Speed Control Ready Indicator
Light
This light will turn on when the speed control
has been turned on, but not set. Refer to “Speed
Control — If Equipped” in “Starting And Oper -
ating” for further information.
Green Indicator Lights
— Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is
set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn sig-
nal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be acti-
vated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
— Front Fog Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —
OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the emis-
sions, engine, and transmission control sys-
tems. When these systems are operating prop-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy , as well as en-
gine emissions well within current government
regulations.
57
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission con-
trol system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter dam-
age and power loss will soon occur . Imme-
diate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls. Autho-
rized service technicians may need to access
this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver -behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, in-
cluding safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
• Access, or allow others to access, in-
formation stored in your vehicle sys-
tems, including personal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia”.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
58
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar sensors, located inside the rear bum-
per fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that en-
ter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side
of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the
vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rear view mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detec-
tion zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes
Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear ,
front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary.
The BSM system will issue an alert during these
types of zone entries.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, al-
ways check your vehicle’ s mirrors, glance over
your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended
to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
Rear Detection Zones
59
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles
can be obscured by vehicles parked on either
side. If the sensors are blocked by other struc-
tures or vehicles, the system will not be able to
alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE,
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
back up aid system. It is intended to be used
to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle
in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be
careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your ve-
hicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, and blind spots before backing
up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Modes Of Operation With Instrument Cluster Display
Three selectable modes of operation are avail-
able in the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Y our Instrument Panel” in your Owner’ s
Manual for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a de-
tected object. However , when the system is
operating in RCP, the system will respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert
in the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then acti-
vated, and it corresponds to an alert present on
that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also
be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if
on) volume will be reduced.
NOTE:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio volume is reduced.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will
request the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio volume is
reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored mode
will be recalled and used.
SAFETY
60
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’ s authority to operate the
equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS W arning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a graphic showing the pres-
sure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values in a different color , when this occurs you
must increase the tire pressure to the recom-
mended cold placard pressure in order for the
TPMS W arning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside tem-
perature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing
and Maintenance” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The tire pressure will also increase as the ve-
hicle is driven. This is normal and there should
be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason, in-
cluding low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or
above the recommended cold placard pressure.
Once the low tire pressure warning (TPMS
W arning Light) illuminates, you must increase
the tire pressure to the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning
Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
61
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three hours)
placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to
turn ON the “TPMS W arning Light.” Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS
W arning Light will still be on. In this situation,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after
the tires are inflated to the vehicle’ s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS W arning
Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. The
TPM sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sen-
sor damage. Customers are encouraged to
use OEM wheels to assure proper TPM
feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Af-
ter using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could dam-
age the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide warn-
ing of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability .
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’ s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS W arning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the ac-
tual tire pressure in the tire.
SAFETY
62
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of
the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings
to the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) con-
sists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illu-
minate in the instrument cluster , a
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” mes-
sage will display in the instrument
cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active
road tire pressures are low. Should this occur,
you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle's recom-
mended cold tire placard pressure value (lo-
cated on the placard label on the driver's-side
B-Pillar).
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received.
NOTE:
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
Service Tpm System
The TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled,
this sequence will repeat, providing the system
fault still exists. The TPMS W arning Light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the
following scenarios:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio fre-
quencies as the TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice
around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
•
The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not
have a TPMS sensor . Therefore the TPMS will not
monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
63
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of
a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ig-
nition switch cycle, a chime will sound, a
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
displayed and the TPMS Warning Light will
turn on.
• After driving for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS W arning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
• Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare tire, the TPMS will auto-
matically update, and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of
the four active road tires.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the
TPMS will no longer chime or flash the TPMS
W arning Light.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
W arning Light will flash on and off for 75 sec-
onds and then turn off.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer -
ence, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’ s authority to operate the
equipment.
SAFETY
64
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Air Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on oth-
ers. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer .
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly , to keep you and your passen-
gers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to mini-
mize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further infor -
mation) must be secured in the appropriate
child restraint or belt-positioning booster
seat in a rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear -facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occupants
and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled per-
son, refer to the “Customer Assistance” sec-
tion for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger, in-
cluding a child in a rear-facing child re-
straint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear -facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
65
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt
Alert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the ST AR T or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and re-
main on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning se-
quence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning se-
quence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on the
outboard front passenger seat or when the seat
is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
SAFETY
66
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal condi-
tions. However, in a collision the seat belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, the air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. Y ou can strike the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver , should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
WARNING!
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. Y ou might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together
can crash into one another in a collision,
hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than
one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
67
WARNING!
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut
into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat
against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately
and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The
lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the in-
side surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat
belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoul-
WARNING!
der so that your strongest bones will take
the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant
to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protec-
tion. Inspect the seat belt system periodi-
cally, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a colli-
sion.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the web-
bing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt
to go around your lap.
Latching And Positioning The Seat Belt
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
SAFETY
68
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen.
To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap
belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and
pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoul-
der and chest with minimal, if any slack so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in
the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If neces-
sary, slide the latch plate down the webbing
to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible
to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or down-
ward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to
release the anchorage, and move it up or down
to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
higher position. After you release the anchorage
button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
69
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be ad-
justed in the upward position without pushing
or squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull down-
ward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could re-
duce the effectiveness of the safety belt in
a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
Second Row Center (If Equipped) and Third
Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third
row center seat belts feature a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the
seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when
the seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate can then be stored out of the
way in the headliner for added convenience to
open up utilization of the storage areas behind
the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate from its stowed position in the
headliner slightly behind the second or third
row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
SAFETY
70
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the
left head restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-
buckle until you hear a “click.”
Mini-Latch Stowage Connect Second Row Mini-Latch To
Buckle
Second Row Mini-Latch And Buckle
Connected
71
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your abdo-
men. To remove slack in the lap belt portion,
pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the
lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt.
A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in
the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular
latch plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If nec-
essary, slide the latch plate down the web-
bing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Insert the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate into its stowed position.
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt
is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not be able to provide proper restraint and
will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing
is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceding procedure to detach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, un-
twist the webbing, and reattach the mini-
latch plate and mini-buckle.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
SAFETY
72
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an autho-
rized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt
Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is
physically required in order to properly fit
the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE
the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center
of the occupant’s body is LESS than
6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
WARNING!
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants in-
cluding pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the shoul-
der belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the perfor-
mance of the seat belt by removing slack from
the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in
child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags,
the pretensioners are single use items. A de-
ployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must
be replaced immediately.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
73
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a retrac-
tor assembly that is designed to release web-
bing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) (If Equipped)
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions may be equipped with a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to
secure a child restraint system. For additional
information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The V ehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’ s mid-
section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as
the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then care-
fully pull out only the amount of webbing nec-
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (2nd Row Bench Seat)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (2nd Row Stow ‘n Go Seating)
SAFETY
74
essary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a
rear seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear -facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear -facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Auto-
matic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt
function is not working properly when
checked according to the procedures in
the Service Manual.
WARNING!
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restrain-
ing the child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment
cannot be readily identified by any markings,
only through visual inspection of the head re-
straint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
75
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter -
mines whether the severity or type of rear im-
pact will require the Active Head Restraints
(AHR) to deploy . If a rear impact requires de-
ployment, both the driver and front passenger
seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to minimize the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE:
The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However, if during a front impact, a secondary
rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based
on the severity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’ s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury
or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acciden-
tal deployment of the Active Head Re-
straint, ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal
injury if the Active Head Restraint is de-
ployed.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam And Trim)
2 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
4 — Seat Back
SAFETY
76
NOTE:
For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Head
Restraints” in “Getting To Know Y our V ehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered dur-
ing a collision, the front half of the head re-
straint will be extended forward and separated
from the rear half of the head restraint (See
Image). Do not drive your vehicle after the AHRs
have deployed.
The head restraint must be reset into the original
position to best protect the occupant for all types
of collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer
must reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat before driving. Personally at-
tempting to reset the AHRs may result in damage
to the AHRs that could impair their function.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect
you in all types of collisions. Have deployed
AHRs reset by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on oth-
ers. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer .
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and inter -
connecting wiring associated with the electrical
Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag W arning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system whenever
the ignition switch is in the ST AR T or ON/RUN
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed
77
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply sys-
tem that may deploy the air bag system even if
the battery loses power or it becomes discon-
nected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag W arn-
ing Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer , tachometer , or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be dis-
abled. In this condition the air bags may not be
ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a collision.
If the light does not come on as a bulb check
when the ignition is first turned on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger .
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compart-
ment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
SAFETY
78
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag de-
ployment could cause serious injury , in-
cluding death. Air bags need room to in-
flate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel.
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear -facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear -facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive in-
formation from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deploy-
ment. A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for
more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch
that detects whether the driver or front passen-
ger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle
switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air
bag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually.
WARNING!
You may damage the air bags and you could
be injured because the air bags may no
longer be functional. The protective covers
for the air bag cushions are designed to
open only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly . In some collisions, air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover colli-
sions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may pro-
duce substantial vehicle damage — for ex-
ample, some pole collisions, truck underrides,
and angle offset collisions.
79
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle decel-
eration over time, vehicle speed and damage by
themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved inter-
action with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, ste-
reos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The Supple-
mental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced
protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occu-
pant injury during certain side impacts, in ad-
dition to the injury reduction potential provided
by the seat belts and body structure.
SAFETY
80
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door . The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly , or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the out-
side edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The SABICs inflate with
enough force to injure occupants if they are not
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bag
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
81
belted and seated properly, or if items are posi-
tioned in the area where the SABICs inflate.
Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim cov-
ering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any ob-
structions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as in-
tended, do not install any accessory items
in your vehicle which could alter the roof.
Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not
drill into the roof of the vehicle for any
reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the de-
ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sen-
sors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is cali-
brated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact
side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side im-
pacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently;
a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags
only and a right-side impact deploys the right
Side Air Bags only . Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not im-
pact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can
be seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where ap-
propriate) are necessary for your protection
in all collisions. They also help keep you in
position, away from an inflating Side Air
Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with
their backs against the seats. Children
must be properly restrained in a child re-
straint or booster seat that is appropriate
for the size of the child.
SAFETY
82
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window . Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
rollover events. The ORC determines whether
the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a par-
ticular rollover event is appropriate, based on
the severity and type of collision. V ehicle dam-
age by itself is not a good indicator of whether or
not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover
events. The rollover sensing system determines
if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event
the vehicle experiences a rollover or near roll-
over event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags
is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both
sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag W arning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate imme-
diately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
83
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However , if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a nor-
mal by-product of the process that generates
the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.
These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air . If
the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another colli-
sion, the air bags will not be in place to protect
you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension-
ers cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,
and the seat belt retractor assemblies re-
placed by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If
Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 min-
utes from the intervention of the Enhanced
Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HV AC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
SAFETY
84
• Cut off battery power to the:
– Engine
– Electric Motor (if equipped)
– Electric power steering
– Brake booster
– Electric park brake
– Automatic transmission gear selector
– Horn
– Front wiper
– Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and re-
move the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery . Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and start-
ing the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the en-
gine compartment and fuel tank before reset-
ting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. Y ou could be injured if the air bag
system is not there to protect you. Do not
modify the components or wiring, includ-
ing adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument
panel. Do not modify the front bumper,
vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be ser -
viced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
85
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving con-
ditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gen-
der, age, and crash location) are recorded. How-
ever, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every
Canadian province, requires that small children
ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride prop-
erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats rather
than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can be-
come a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured
or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the
child restraint.
SAFETY
86
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. Y ou should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers
or call: 1–888–327–4236
• tq;rrCanadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear -facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger , who have outgrown
the height or weight limit of their booster seat
V ehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear -facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear -facing child restraint. Two
types of child restraints can be used rear -facing:
infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear -facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit
of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can
be used either rear -facing or forward-facing in
the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear -facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear -facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
87
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger , in-
cluding a child in a rear-facing child re-
straint.
• Never install a rear -facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear -facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear -facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear -facing car seat using a
rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of
this vehicle is not designed to manage the
crash forces of this type of car seat. In a
crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer,
and your child may be more severely injured
as a result.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear -facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-
facing child seats and convertible child seats
used in the forward-facing direction are for chil-
dren who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit
of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Chil-
dren should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to
the highest weight or height allowed by the child
seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should
use a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
SAFETY
88
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be
badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’ s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat for -
ward or rearward because it can loosen the
child restraint attachments. Remove the
child restraint before adjusting the vehicle
seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause se-
rious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’ s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’ s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’ s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the
lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat
belt correctly.
89
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear -Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear -Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
SAFETY
90
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.
The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor
points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at
the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages
are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’ s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchor-
age but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child re-
straint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Label 2nd Row Bench Seat – LATCH Positions
91
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’ s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchor-
age system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the com-
bined weight of the child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
2nd Row Stow ‘n Go Seating
SAFETY
92
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear -facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’ s
manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use
the seat belt to install a child seat in the center
position next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row bench seating head restraints are
removable if they interfere with the installation of
the child restraint. The 2nd row stow n’ go head
restraints are not removable. The 3rd row center
head restraint is removable in all vehicles, but the
3rd row outboard head restraints are not remov-
able. Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To
Know Your V ehicle” for further information.
93
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child re-
straint, the head restraint may be folded and the
child seat installed in front of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your
finger along the gap between the seatback and
seat cushion.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 – Folded Headrest
2 – Child Restraint
2nd Row Bench Seat LATCH Lower
Anchorages
SAFETY
94
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Bench Seating
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat, near the floor.
2nd Row Stow n’ Go Seat LATCH Lower
Anchorages
3rd Row 60/40 Seat LATCH Lower
Anchorages
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row
Bench Anchorage Shown)
95
Stow n’ Go Seating
There are tether strap anchorages located be-
hind the second row seating positions and the
third row center seating position. The tether
anchorages are located on the back of the seat,
near the floor.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or connector
to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to
tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear -
facing child restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a
hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it
is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center posi-
tion blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for
the outboard position, do not use that outboard
position. If a child seat in the center position
blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt,
do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to at-
tach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint” for typical installation in-
structions.
Always follow the directions of the child re-
straint manufacturer when installing your child
restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row
60/40 Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row
Captains Chair Anchorage Shown)
SAFETY
96
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt,
stow the seat belt, following the instructions
below. See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower an-
chorages for that seating position. For some
second row seats, you may need to recline
the seat and / or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear -
most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat for-
ward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, con-
nect it to the top tether anchorage. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child re-
straint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in
the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when in-
stalling an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
97
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be se-
cured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’ s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with either a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinch-
ing latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts
are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip.
The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of
the retractor and then letting the webbing re-
tract back into the retractor . If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the web-
bing is pulled back into the retractor . Refer to
the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR. The cinching
latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of
the seat belt tight when webbing is pulled tight
and straight through a child restraint’ s belt
path.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Second Row Bench Seating
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate
SAFETY
98
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’ s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the Tether
Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
W eight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint,
up to the recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Second Row Stow n’ Go Seating
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate
99
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row bench seating head restraints are
removable if they interfere with the installation of
the child restraint. The 2nd row stow n’ go head
restraints are not removable. The 3rd row center
head restraint is removable in all vehicles, but the
3rd row outboard head restraints are not remov-
able. Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To
Know Your V ehicle” for further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH),
the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child re-
straint, the head restraint may be folded and the
child seat installed in front of it.
SAFETY
100
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be se-
cured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row seats,
you may need to recline the seat and/or raise
the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. Y ou may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor . As the webbing re-
tracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor . If
it is locked, you should not be able to pull out
any webbing. If the retractor is not locked,
repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child re-
straint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 – Folded Headrest
2 – Child Restraint
101
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Us-
ing the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions
to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally , and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be se-
cured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’ s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row seats,
you may need to recline the seat and / or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. Y ou may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing
from the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child re-
straint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Us-
ing the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions
to attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally , and pull it tight if
necessary.
SAFETY
102
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too
close to the belt path opening of the child
restraint, you may have trouble tightening the
seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch
plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten
it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out, away from the child
restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to com-
plete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you
shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle, turn the buckle around one
half turn, and insert the latch plate into the
buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating
position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Top Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear -facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for
the location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting (Second
Row Bench Anchorage Shown)
103
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head re-
straints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the two posts. If
not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and pos-
sible injury to the child. Use only the an-
chorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a passen-
ger during panic braking or in a collision.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting (Second
Row Captains Chair Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row
60/40 Anchorage Shown)
SAFETY
104
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPOR T PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather . Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your heat-
ing or cooling controls to force outside air
into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the under -
side or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a
competent mechanic inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for bro-
ken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could
permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passen-
ger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically , check-
ing for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged
parts must be replaced immediately . Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
105
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system in-
spected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag System has been detected. It will
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your ve-
hicle. Only use a floor mat that does not inter -
fere with the operation of the accelerator, brake
or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is
securely attached using the floor mat fasteners
so it cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the accelerator , brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to inter -
fere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over . Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
WARNING!
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER in-
stall or stack an additional floor mat on top
of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured
to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the ac-
celerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If
your floor mat interferes with the operation
of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor ,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’ s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
SAFETY
106
WARNING!
•
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the ve-
hicle is moving. Objects can become trapped
under accelerator , brake, or clutch pedals and
could cause a loss of vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These ob-
jects could change the position of the floor
mat and may cause interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat fasten-
ers are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully
depress each pedal to check for interfer -
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and un-
even wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam indi-
cator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
107
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle accelera-
tion in low gear can be detrimental and should
be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which ve-
hicle operations will occur . For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Min-
eral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting
a vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into P ARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob. When the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against un-
wanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, re-
move the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
• Never use the P ARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting the
vehicle to guard against vehicle movement
and possible injury or damage.
STARTING AND OPERATING
108
WARNING!
• Y our vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in P ARK. Check by
trying to move the gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allow-
ing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could op-
erate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of P ARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
• Do not shift between P ARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECON) mode can improve
the vehicle's overall fuel economy during normal
driving conditions. Push the “econ” switch in
the center stack of the instrument panel and a
green light will indicate the ECON mode is
engaged.
When the Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode is en-
abled, the vehicle control systems will change
the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and
downshift later.
• The transmission will skip select gears during
shifts to allow the engine to operate at lower
speeds.
• The torque converter clutch may engage at
lower engine speeds and remain on longer.
ECON Switch Location
109
• The engine idle speed will be lower.
• The overall driving performance will be more
conservative.
• Some ECON mode functions may be tempo-
rarily inhibited based on temperature and
other factors.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from P ARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accel-
erating. This is especially important when the
engine is cold.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows the driver to limit the highest available
gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For
example, if you set the transmission gear limit
to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not shift
above fourth gear (except to prevent engine
overspeed), but will shift through the lower
gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode
at any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is
in the DRIVE position, the transmission will
operate automatically , shifting between all
available gears. Tapping the gear selector to the
left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and set
that gear as the top available gear . Once in ERS
mode, tapping the gear selector to the left (-) or
right (+) will change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply hold the gear selector
to the right (+) until the gear limit display
disappears from the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip and the vehicle could
skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
Electronic Range Select
STARTING AND OPERATING
110
Transmission Gear Position Display
123456D
Actual Gear(s) Allowed 1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–6
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), tap the gear se-
lector to the left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle
slows. The transmission will shift to the range
from which the vehicle can best be slowed
down.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down
if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed
Control System can be reactivated by pushing
the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the condi-
tions, and you could lose control and have an
accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy , snow-
covered or slippery.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — Push CANCEL
2 — Push ON/OFF
3 — Push RES (+)/Accel
4 — Push SET (-) /Decel
111
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster display will illu-
minate. To turn the system off, push the ON/
OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator
Light will turn off. The system should be turned
off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. Y ou could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster
than you want. You could lose control and
have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (-) button.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
(+) button and release. Resume can be used at
any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button, or returning the
ignition to OFF, erases the set speed from
memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system pro-
vides visual and audible indications of the dis-
tance between the rear fascia and a detected
obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking
maneuver.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precau-
tions” in “Starting And Operating” in your Own-
er’s Manual for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (en-
abled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is en-
abled at this gear selector position, the system
will remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less
than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the ve-
hicle that is within the sensors’ field of view . The
sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizon-
tal direction, depending on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
112
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the
instrument cluster display. It provides both vi-
sual and audible warnings to indicate the dis-
tance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle.
The ParkSense W arning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section
of the instrument cluster display. Refer to “In-
strument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’ s Manual
for further information.
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
through the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the instrument cluster display. The
available choices are: OFF, Sound Only , or
Sound and Display.
When ParkSense is disabled, the instrument
cluster will display the “P ARK ASSIST SYSTEM
OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument clus-
ter display will display the “P ARK ASSIST SYS-
TEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get-
ting To Know Y our Instrument Panel” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Fur-
thermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the RE-
VERSE position and ParkSense is turned off,
the instrument cluster display will display
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly , taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow ,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an ob-
stacle behind the fascia/bumper , or it could
provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the
ParkSense system off if objects such as bi-
cycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed
within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SER VICE REQUIRED” mes-
sage to be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
113
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. Y ou are
responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Fail-
ure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly rec-
ommended that the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly is disconnected from the
vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles be-
cause the hitch ball will be much closer to
the obstacle than the rear fascia when the
loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indi-
cation that an obstacle is behind the ve-
hicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, includ-
ing small obstacles. Parking curbs might
be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are
in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP
CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on
the touchscreen or if equipped, in the rearview
mirror. If the image is displayed in the Uconnect
screen, a caution note to “check entire sur -
roundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear . The
ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located on
the rear of the vehicle, above the rear license
plate.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera:
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Backup Camera" button to turn
the Rear View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE,
the rear camera mode is exited and the last
selected touchscreen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera
image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting to another gear , unless the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmis-
sion is shifted into P ARK, the ignition is
switched to the OFF position, or the touch-
screen button “X” to disable display of the Rear
View Camera image is pressed.
STARTING AND OPERATING
114
NOTE:
The programmable features of the ParkView
Rear Backup Camera can be selected through
the touchscreen. Refer to your Uconnect Own-
er’s Manual Supplement for further information.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate
the width of the vehicle while a dashed center -
line will indicate the center of the vehicle to
assist with aligning to a hitch/receiver.
The static grid lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle. The following table shows the ap-
proximate distances for each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)
Yellow 1ft-3ft(30cm-1m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while
backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The
ParkView camera is unable to view every
obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow , ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water , and dry with a soft cloth. Do not
cover the lens.
115
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door
on the left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is
for use with this vehicle.
NOTE:
The driver's side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature oper-
ates only when the sliding door is fully closed
prior to opening the fuel door.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap. A poorly
fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel
system and may cause the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on, due to
fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the gas cap is re-
moved or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and fed-
eral fire regulations and may cause the
MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into
a portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. Y ou could be burned. Always
place gas containers on the ground while
filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a
“clicking” sound. This is an indication that
the fuel filler cap is properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the
MIL may come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed,
or damaged, a ”gASCAP” message will display
in the odometer or a “Check Gascap” message
will display in the instrument cluster . If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and
press the Trip Odometer button to turn off the
message. If the problem continues, the mes-
sage will appear the next time the vehicle is
started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel
filler cap may also turn on the MIL.
Fuel Filler Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING
116
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline con-
tains a higher level of
detergents to further
aide in minimizing en-
gine and fuel system de-
posits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER
Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www .toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these mate-
rials intended for gum and varnish removal may
contain active solvents or similar ingredients.
These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Weight)
Max. Tongue Weight
3.6L/Automatic
8,750 lbs (3 968 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
Up to 2 persons & Luggage
3,600 lbs (1 632 kg)*
360 lbs (163 kg)
8,750 lbs (3 968 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
3 to 5 persons & Luggage
3,450 lbs (1 565 kg)*
345 lbs (156 kg)
8,750 lbs (3 968 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6 to 7 persons & Luggage
3,000 lbs (1 360 kg)*
300 lbs (136 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
117
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight ref-
erenced on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing
and Maintenance” for further information.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground All Models
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL
BEST METHOD
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for addi-
tional details.
STARTING AND OPERATING
118
Recreational Towing — All Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accom-
plished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the
transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to
the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle
requires towing, make sure the drive
wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion damage. Damage from improper tow-
ing is not covered under the New V ehicle
Limited W arranty.
• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
119
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard W arning flasher switch is located in
the lower center area of the instrument panel.
Push the switch to turn on the Haz-
ard Warning flasher . When the
switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency.
Push the switch a second time to turn off the
Hazard W arning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis-
tance, the Hazard W arning flashers will con-
tinue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp 578
Center & Rear Reading Lamps 578
Front Door Courtesy Lamp 578
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped 578
Instrument Cluster Lamps PC74
Liftgate Lamp(s) 578
Overhead Console Reading Lamps PC579
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped 194
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
120
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamp H11LL
Fog Lamp – If Equipped PSX24W
Front Side Marker , Park/Turn Signal 3757A or PY27/7W
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal Lamp LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Backup Lamp 3157
License 168
NOTE:
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or
glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are
not approved and should not be used for re-
placement.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material.
Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker
cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper
fuses may result in serious personal injury,
fire and/or property damage.
WARNING!
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety sys-
tems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
121
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located
in the engine compartment near the battery.
Refer to the applicable “Engine Compartment”
illustration in this section. This center contains
cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed or
embossed on the inside of the cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the Totally Integrated
Power Module cover , it is important to
ensure the cover is properly positioned and
fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical
system failure.
CAUTION!
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is impor -
tant to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that
must be corrected.
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the following table.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
J1 40 Amp Green – Power Folding Seat
J2 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
J3 30 Amp Pink – Rear Door Module
J4 25 Amp Clear – Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp Clear – Passenger Door Node
J6 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brakes Pump/Stability Control System
J7 30 Amp Pink – Antilock Brakes Valve/Stability Control System
J8 40 Amp Green – Power Memory Seat – If Equipped
J9 – – Not Used
J10 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Wash/Manifold Tuning V alve – If Equipped
J11 30 Amp Pink – Power Sliding Door Module/Anti–Theft Module – If Equipped
J12 30 Amp Pink – HV AC Rear Blower , Radiator Fan Motor
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
122
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
J13 60 Amp Y ellow – Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main
J14 40 Amp Green – Rear Window Defogger
J15 40 Amp Green – Front Blower
J17 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
J18 20 Amp Blue – Powertrain Control Module Trans Range
J19 60 Amp Y ellow – Radiator Fan
J20 30 Amp Pink – Front W iper LO/HI
J21 20 Amp Blue – Front/Rear W asher
J22 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Module
M1 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Center Brake Lamp/Brake Switch
M2 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Fog Lamps
M3 – 20 Amp Yellow V acuum Pump Motor
M5 – 25 Amp Clear Inverter
M6 – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlet #1 (ACC), Rain Sensor ,
Cigar Lighter (Instrument Panel or with Console Rear)
M7 – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT) –
Center Seat or with Console Rear
M8 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat — If Equipped
M9 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat — If Equipped
M10 – 15 Amp Blue
Ignition Off Draw — V ideo System, Satellite Radio, DVD,
Hands-Free Module, Universal Garage Door Opener , Vanity Lamp,
Streaming V ideo Module — If Equipped
M11 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control System
M12 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier/Radio
123
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
M13 – 20 Amp Yellow
Instrument Cluster, SIREN, Clock Module,
Multifunction Control Switch – If Equipped
M14 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow — If Equipped
M15 – 20 Amp Yellow
Rear V iew Mirror , Instrument Cluster , Multifunction Control Switch,
Tire Pressure Monitor
M16 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module/Occupant Classification Module
M17 – 15 Amp Blue Left Tail/License/Park Lamp, Running Lamps
M18 – 15 Amp Blue Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp
M19 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain
M20 – 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Cluster Interior Light, Switch Bank,
Steering Column Module, Switch Steering Wheel
M21 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
M22 – 10 Amp Red Horn
M23 – 10 Amp Red Horn
M24 – 25 Amp Clear Rear W iper
M25 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
M26 – 10 Amp Red Power Mirror Switch, Driver W indow Switch
M27 – 10 Amp Red Wireless Control Module, Keyless Entry Module
M28 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain, Transmission Control Module
M29 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Classification Module
M30 – 15 Amp Blue Diagnostic Feed
M31 – 20 Amp Yellow Back-Up Lamps
M32 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module, THATCHUM — If Equipped
M33 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
124
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
M34 – 10 Amp Red
Park Assist, Heater Climate Control Module, Headlamp Wash,
Compass, Rear Camera, Door Lamps, Flashlight,
Relay Diesel Cabin Heater
M35 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
M36 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #3 (Instrument Panel Or With Console Center)
M37 – 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes, Stability Control, Stop Lamp, Fuel Pump
M38 – 25 Amp Clear Door Lock/Unlock Motors, Liftgate Lock/Unlock Motors
The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp
circuit breaker located in the Totally Integrated
Power Module.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is danger -
ous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and
fall on you. You could be crushed. Never
put any part of your body under a vehicle
that is on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
WARNING!
• Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only . The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm
level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
125
Jack Location
If equipped, the jack, jack handle and winch
handle tools are stowed behind the rear left side
trim panel in the rear cargo area. Turn the two
cover latches to release the cover.
Spare Tire Tools
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can
be assembled into a spare tire hook; to remove
the compact spare tire/cover assembly from
under the vehicle, or a Winch T-handle; to raise/
lower the compact spare tire/cover assembly.
To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut
To access the spare tire winch drive nut and
lower the spare tire, you will need to refer to one
of the following center console configurations.
Jack And Tool Location
Assembled T-handle
1 — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
Assembling The Spare Tire Hook
1 — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
126
Super Console
For vehicles equipped with the Super Console,
the spare tire winch assembly drive nut is lo-
cated beneath the console.
1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the
floor console to gain clear access to the tire
winch drive nut.
2. Open the front drawer to expose the storage
compartment.
3. Remove the liner from the console's storage
compartment to access the spare tire winch
drive nut.
Super Console
1 — Lower Drawer
2 — Front Drawer Liner
3 — Front Drawer
Storage Compartment Location
Winch Drive Nut Location
127
Base Cargo Center Console
Pull the W inch Cover assembly plug and re-
tainer clip (if equipped) to access the winch
drive nut.
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover
located under the center of the vehicle between
the front doors by means of a cable winch
mechanism. The “spare tire drive” nut is lo-
cated on the floor , under a plastic cap at the
front of the floor console or under front super
console forward bin liner.
Spare Tire Removal Instructions
The spare tire is located under the vehicle be-
neath the center console area.
1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a T-handle
and place the square end over the spare tire
winch drive nut.
2. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch
mechanism stops turning freely. This will
allow enough slack in the cable to allow you
to pull the spare tire out from underneath the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use
with the winch T-handle only. Use of an air
wrench or other power tools is not recom-
mended and can damage the winch.
3. To remove the compact spare tire/cover as-
sembly, assemble the winch T-handle exten-
sions to form a spare tire hook, and pull the
spare tire out from under the vehicle.
Winch Cover Location
Spare Tire Carrier
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
128
NOTE:
If either front tire is flat it may be necessary
to jack up the vehicle to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the
vehicle.
4. Stand the tire/cover assembly upright.
Squeeze the winch retaining tabs together
while simultaneously pushing them through
the hole in the cover and the steel rim. This
will free the winch cable from the spare tire.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into P ARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
Spare Tire And Hook
1 — Spare Tire
2 — Spare Tire Hook
Wheel Spacer
129
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the right front wheel is being
changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard W arning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an
automatic transmission to P ARK; a
manual transmission to REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
WARNING!
• If working on or near a roadway, be ex-
tremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
Wheel Blocked
Jack Warning Label
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
130
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of
“Tires – General Information” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for information about the com-
pact spare tire, its use, and operation.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on
each side of the vehicle body. These loca-
tions are on the sill flange of the vehicle
body.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated.
Rear jack locations are between a pair of
down-facing tabs on the sill flange of the
vehicle side body.
Front jack location is on the sill flange of the
vehicle body and is located 6 inches (150
mm) from door edge.
Jack Engagement Locations
Rear Jacking Location Engaged
Front Jacking Location Engaged
131
NOTE:
In some situations the jack may need to be
placed on its side in order to be pushed
under the vehicle. Return the jack to its
correct orientation once it is under the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is danger-
ous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and
fall on you. Y ou could be crushed. Never get
any part of your body under a vehicle that is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn
to the right until the jack head is properly
engaged in the appropriate location. Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack
is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to
the right, using the swivel wrench. Raise the
vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained to
install the compact spare tire. Minimum tire
lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip
off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise
the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts. For vehicles
with wheel covers, remove the cover from the
wheel by hand by holding down the wheel
and pulling on convenient features on the
cover. Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then
pull the wheel off the hub.
6.
Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten
all the lug nuts until the wheel sits flush onto
the hub and there is no play . The nuts will have
to be fully tightened once the vehicle is low-
ered. Tightening an improperly seated wheel
under vehicle load can damage the threads,
cause vibration, and undermine safety.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incor-
rectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury.
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the com-
pact spare.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
to the left.
Installing Compact Spare
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
132
8. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tight-
ened twice. For correct lug nut torque refer
to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places pro-
vided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact
spare tire cover assembly in the rear cargo
area. Do not stow the deflated tire in the
compact spare tire location. Have the full-
sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as
possible.
11. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before
driving the vehicle. Reassemble the winch
handle extensions to form a “T” and fit the
winch T-handle over the drive nut. Rotate
the nut to the right until the winch mecha-
nism clicks at least three times.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Spare Tire Tools” section for
instructions on assembling the T-handle.
12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch
handle tools back in the stowage
compartment.
13. Check the compact spare tire pressure as
soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure,
as required.
Securing The Compact Spare Tire
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to
form a T-handle and fit the winch T-handle
over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to the left
until the winch mechanism stops turning
freely. This will allow enough slack in the
cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer
out from under the vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly,
thrown forward in a collision or hard stop
could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the compact spare tire with the
cover assembly in the place provided.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use
with the winch T-handle only. Use of an air
wrench or other power tools is not recom-
mended and can damage the winch.
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to
form the spare tire hook, and pull the wheel
spacer from under the vehicle.
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve
stem is down, and place the tire into the
compact spare tire/cover assembly. Slide the
wheel spacer through the center of the wheel
and compact spare tire/cover assembly , so
that the two retainer tabs snap out and en-
gage the compact spare tire cover on the
opposite side.
133
WARNING!
V erify that both retainer tabs of the wheel
spacer have been properly extended through
the center of the wheel and compact spare
tire/cover assembly . Failure to properly en-
gage both retainer tabs could result in loss of
the compact spare tire and cover assembly ,
which will cause vehicle damage and may
cause loss of vehicle control and serious
personal injury.
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must
be used when the compact spare tire is
stored. Failure to use this cover could drasti-
cally reduce the life of the compact spare
tire.
4. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the drive
nut to the right until the compact spare
tire/cover assembly is drawn into place
against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until
you hear the winch mechanism click three
times. It cannot be overtightened. Check
under the vehicle to ensure the compact
spare tire/cover assembly is positioned cor -
rectly against the underside of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed specifi-
cally to stow a compact spare tire only. Do not
attempt to use the winch to stow the full size
deflated tire, or any other full-size tire, as the
tire may not be held securely. Vehicle dam-
age may result.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2.
To ease the installation process for steel
wheels with wheel covers, install two lug nuts
on the mounting studs which are on each side
of the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the
cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with
the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover
by hand, snapping the cover over the two lug
nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive
force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Wheel Cover Installation
1 — V alve Stem
2 — V alve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
134
Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the
wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is no
play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened
once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an
improperly seated wheel under vehicle load
can damage the threads, cause vibration,
and undermine safety.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tight-
ened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications”
in “Technical Specifications” for proper
wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the
wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is no
play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened
once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an
improperly seated wheel under vehicle load
can damage the threads, cause vibration,
and undermine safety.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tight-
ened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications”
in the “Technical Specifications” section for
proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your autho-
rized dealer or at a service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Ser -
vice Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm)
in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service
Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
should not be removed from the tire. Tire Ser -
vice Kit can be used in outside temperatures
down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will
provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km)
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
135
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed behind the rear
left side trim panel in the rear cargo area.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Turn the two rear left side trim panel latches
to release the trim panel.
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the fol-
lowing symbols to indicate the air or sealant
mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this
position for air pump operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant
and to inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once to turn
On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the
Power Button again to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over -inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle
prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Re-
fer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement” in this
section.
• The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application
use and needs to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immedi-
ately at your original equipment vehicle
dealer.
Tire Service Kit (Bottom View)
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Hose Attachments
3 — Sealant/Air Hose
Tire Service Kit (Top View)
1 — Power Plug
2 — Mode Select Knob
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Switch
5 — Deflation Button
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
136
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water , and a damp cloth will re-
move the material from the vehicle or tire and
wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it
can easily be peeled off and properly dis-
carded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before
connecting the Tire Service Kit.
• The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended
to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread/contact surface of your
vehicle’s tires.
• The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to
seal punctures on the tires' side walls.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory Storage
Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump)
for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflat-
able items. However , use only the Air Pump
and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driv-
ing with extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driv-
ing on a flat tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of
the tire or the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Fail-
ure to follow these warnings can result in
WARNING!
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately
with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If
swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water .
Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physi-
cian immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.
137
2. V erify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep
the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This
will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem
in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in P ARK and cycle
the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning ON
the Tire Service Kit.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the Seal-
ant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle
through the Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem. Make sure the valve
stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Seal-
ant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the
Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode
position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different
12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or an-
other vehicle, if available. Make sure the
vehicle is running before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant
is no longer flowing through hose (typically
takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure
Gauge can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly
from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle
is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle is
empty. Continue to operate the pump and
inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation pres-
sure found on the tire and loading informa-
tion label located in the driver-side door
opening. Check the tire pressure by looking
at the Pressure Gauge.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
138
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
to drive the vehicle further . Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over -inflated, push the De-
flation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before con-
tinuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn off the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Remove the speed limit label from the Tire
Service Kit and place sticker on the steering
wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the
Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage loca-
tion. Proceed to “Drive V ehicle.”
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflat-
ing the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or
10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire
Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not ex-
ceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat
tire repair . Have the tire inspected and re-
paired or replaced after using the Tire Service
Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you. Have the tire checked
as soon as possible at your authorized dealer.
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever
You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section
before continuing.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle's 12 V olt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the
end of the hose onto the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the
Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Ser -
vice Kit and inflate the tire to the cold tire
inflation pressure found on the tire and load-
ing information label located in the driver -
side door opening.
139
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over -inflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure
to the recommended inflation pressure be-
fore continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 V olt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper stor-
age area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or re-
placed at the earliest opportunity at an au-
thorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
steering wheel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Sealant
Bottle Replacement”.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has
been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
3. Remove the bottle cover.
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to
release.
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
NOTE:
• For sealant bottle installation, follow these
steps reverse order.
• Replacement sealant bottles are available at
authorized service centers.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly so please follow
the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’ s operating instructions
and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system volt-
age greater than 12 V olts or damage to the
battery, starter motor , alternator or electrical
system may occur.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left
side of the engine compartment.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
140
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. Y ou can
be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
WARNING!
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate hydro-
gen gas which is flammable and explosive.
Keep open flames or sparks away from the
battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into P ARK and turn the ignition
to OFF/LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater , radio, and all unneces-
sary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is in the OFF/LOCK
position.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could re-
sult in damage to the charging system of the
booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the dis-
charged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
Positive Battery Post
141
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground (ex-
posed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s
engine) away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle for a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle, you should have the battery and charg-
ing system inspected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’ s battery ,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s bat-
tery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can re-
duce the potential for overheating your engine
by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not in-
crease engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
142
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine cool-
ing system and turning the A/C off can help
remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you
can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the gear selector override access
cover (located near the top right of the gear
selector in the instrument panel).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the
access hole, and push and hold the override
release lever forward.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access
cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between DRIVE and RE-
VERSE while gently pressing the accelerator .
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pres-
sure that will maintain the rocking motion, with-
out spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
Gear Selector Override
143
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "ESC
Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Safety”
in your Owner’ s Manual for further information.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC
Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not
spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may re-
sult.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission overheat-
ing and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
144
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a dis-
abled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
•
Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear
Front OK
Flatbed
ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’ s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bum-
pers or associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrost-
ers, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must
be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, refer to "Gear Selector
Override" in this section for instructions on shift-
ing the transmission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. V ehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with an-
other vehicle as damage to the bumper
fascia and transmission may result.
145
The manufacturer recommends towing your ve-
hicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using
a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not available,
and the transmission is operable, the vehicle
may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the
ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed
15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the ve-
hicle must be towed faster than 25 mph
(40 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km), it
must be towed with the front wheels OFF the
ground (using a flatbed truck, or wheel lift
equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or
farther than 15 miles (24 km) with front
wheels on the ground can cause severe trans-
mission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited W arranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”
in “Safety” for further information on the En-
hanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under cer -
tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as
an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”
in “Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
146
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indica-
tor system will remind you that it is time to take
your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-
trips, trailer tow , extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can
cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the sched-
uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is
performed by someone other than your autho-
rized dealer, the message can be reset by refer-
ring to the steps described under “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Y our In-
strument Panel” in your Owner’ s Manual for
further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if
the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road
environment or is operated predominately at
idle or only very low engine RPM’ s. This type of
vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering and
fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
147
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the
following page for the required maintenance
intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
•
Change oil and filter.
•
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
•
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
•
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
•
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
•
Inspect exhaust system.
•
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
148
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot
seals, and replace if necessary .
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. (**) X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
XX
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
if using your vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
XX
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter . X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
(**) The spark plug change interval is mileage
based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
149
WARNING!
• Y ou can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a ser -
vice job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an ac-
cident.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
150
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Engine Compartment — 3.6L
1 — Air Filter 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Battery 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 10 — W asher Fluid Reservoir
151
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Iden-
tification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Defi-
nitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed to
this standard have the tire size molded into
the sidewall beginning with the section width.
The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on U.S. design standards. The size designa-
tion for LT-Metric tires is the same as for
P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that
are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum
Load
2 — Size
Designation
5 — Maximum
Pressure
3 — Service
Description
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and
Temperature
Grades
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
152
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
•
"R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
153
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
154
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of
the tire; however , the date code may only be on
one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the
full TIN, including the date code, located on the
white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the
TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you
will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
155
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door .
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
V ehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’ s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
156
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, includ-
ing the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly
and inflate to the recommended pressure for
your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry .
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-
sures specified on the Tire and Loading Infor -
mation placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this
manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
157
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and
Loading Information placard. The combined
weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never ex-
ceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct
Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely ex-
ceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer ,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68)
= 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage,
and towing capacities of your vehicle with
varying seating configurations and number
and size of occupants. This table is for illus-
tration purposes only and may not be accurate
for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
158
• For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
159
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Over -
loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping dis-
tance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
• Safety and V ehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can af-
fect vehicle handling and can fail sud-
denly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. Y ou could lose control of your
vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect
the stability of the vehicle and can produce a
feeling of sluggish response or over responsive-
ness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering re-
sponse.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling re-
sistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-
able ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
160
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly in-
flated even when they are under -inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from en-
tering the valve stem, which could damage
the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the Win-
ter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be in-
creased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure
will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain-
ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced ve-
hicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum ca-
pacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
161
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be re-
paired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A
Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately . A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode
(14 psi (96 kPa)) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-
tions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 sec-
onds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
162
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equip-
ment tires to help you in determining when your
tires should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be re-
placed.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting
in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can re-
sult in sudden tire failure. Y ou could lose
control and have a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel V alve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear in
existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be in-
spected regularly for wear and correct cold tire
inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph
on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Re-
fer to the Tire and Loading Information placard
or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Tire Tread
1 — W orn Tire
2 — New Tire
163
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair . Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the origi-
nal wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replace-
ment tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
dling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable han-
dling and stress to steering and suspension
components. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury
WARNING!
or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes
with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index
or capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can re-
sult in sudden tire failure and loss of ve-
hicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a differ-
ent size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer , Fall, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow .
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
164
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice condi-
tions. Y ou could lose vehicle control, result-
ing in severe injury or death. Driving too fast
for conditions also creates the possibility of
loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires,
select tires equivalent in
size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use
snow tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the
safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sustained
speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds
above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for rec-
ommended safe operating speeds, loading and
cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of non-
studded tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit in-
stead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service
Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in the Owner’ s
Manual for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use tem-
porary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle
may result.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” in the Owner’ s
Manual for restrictions when towing with a spare
tire designated for temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an autho-
rized tire dealer for the recommended tire rota-
tion pattern.
165
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. Y ou can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and Load-
ing Information Placard located on the driver’ s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first op-
portunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at
any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for tem-
porary emergency use only. W ith these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim-
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. Y ou can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and Load-
ing Information Placard located on the driver’ s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first op-
portunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump be-
fore lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for tem-
porary emergency use only. W ith these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim-
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
166
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu-
nity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emer-
gency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This
label contains the driving limitations for this
spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do
not drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportu-
nity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to
do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
W ash wheels with the same soap solution rec-
ommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline addi-
tives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
V ehicle Limited W arranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
167
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom-
mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner .
These products may damage the wheel's pro-
tective finish. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these spe-
cialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will
permanently damage this finish and such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited W arranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all
that is required to maintain this finish.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on your
vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in addi-
tion to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart sig-
nificantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
168
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to low-
est, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified govern-
ment test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance, which all passenger vehicle tires
must meet under the Federal Motor V e-
hicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel, than
the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under -inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combi-
nation, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
169
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a high quality six sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recom-
mended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any
dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug
nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY)
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for
Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can
be identified by a unique fuel filler door label
that states “Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gaso-
line Only” and/or a yellow fuel cap. Refer to the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door
label or a yellow gas cap can operate on
E-85.
Torque Pattern
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
170
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
20 Gallons 76 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W -20, API Certified). 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
13.4 Quarts 12.6 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Quarts (2.8 Liters) if equipped with a rear heater.
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
W e recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
W e recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar , Pennzoil, and Pennzoil Gold Semi-Synthetic.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter W e recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs W e recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine 87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol.
171
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may re-
sult in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
CAUTION!
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming
to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
CAUTION!
not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-
rust products, as they may not be compat-
ible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-
based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-9602. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
W e recommend Mopar ATF+4 Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder W e recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90039.
Power Steering Reservoir W e recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4, Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-9602.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
172
MOPAR ACCESSORIES
Authentic Accessories By Mopar
The following highlights just some of the many
Authentic Dodge Accessories by Mopar featur-
ing a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for
your Dodge Grand Caravan.
In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain far
more than expressive style, premium protec-
tion, or extreme entertainment, you also benefit
from enhancing your vehicle with accessories
that have been thoroughly tested and factory-
approved.
For the full line of Authentic Dodge Accessories
by Mopar , visit your local dealership or online at
mopar.com for U.S. residents and mopar .ca for
Canadian residents.
EXTERIOR:
• Front Air Deflector • Front End Cover • Molded Splash Guards
• Hitch Receiver • Fog Lights • Side Window Air Deflectors
• Molded Running Boards • Removable Roof Rack • Sunroof Air Deflector
• Wheel Locks
INTERIOR:
• Storage Tote • Door Sill Guards • Cargo Tray
• All Weather Mats • Ambient Light Kit • Cargo Floor Liner
• Spare Tire Kit • Premium Carpet Floor Mats
ELECTRONICS:
• Park Distance Sensors • Remote Start • Overhead DVD Rear Seat V ideo System
• Electronic Vehicle Tracking System • Rearview Camera
173
CARRIERS:
• Hitch-mount Bike Carrier • Roof Mount Kayak Carrier • Roof Box Cargo Carrier
• Roof Mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier • Tent Kit • Roof Mount Canoe Carrier
• Soft Sided Roof Mounted Cargo Carrier • Roof Mount Upright Bike Carrier
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
174
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain se-
curity features to reduce the risk of unauthor-
ized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software
technology continues to evolve over time and
FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evalu-
ates and takes appropriate steps as needed.
Similar to a computer or other devices, your
vehicle may require software updates to im-
prove the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unau-
thorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s sys-
tems are breached. It may be possible that
vehicle systems, including safety related
systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual ve-
hicle behavior , take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
– Routinely check www .driveuconnect.com
to learn about available Uconnect soft-
ware updates.
– Only connect and use trusted media de-
vices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communica-
tions cannot be assured. Third parties may un-
lawfully intercept information and private com-
munications without your consent. For further
information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic Sys-
tem (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Y our Instrument Panel” in your Owner’ s
Manual.
175
UCONNECT 430/430N
Uconnect 430/430N
1 — V oice Command Button
2 — LOAD Button
3 — MENU Button
4 — AUDIO Settings Button
5 — Internal Hard Drive Button
6 — USB Port
7 — Audio Jack
8 — Radio Sales Code
9 — ON/OFF/Rotate For V olume
10 — Select MEDIA Mode Button
11 — RADIO Mode Button
12 — Uconnect Phone Button
MULTIMEDIA
176
NOTE:
• Your radio may not be equipped with the
Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect
Phone features. To determine if your radio has
these features, push the Voice Command but-
ton on the radio. You will hear a voice prompt
if you have the feature, or see a message on
the radio stating “Uconnect Phone not avail-
able” if you do not.
• Your radio has many features that add to the
comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these radio features
should not be used when driving because they
take your eyes from the road or your attention
from driving.
Clock Setting
1. Turn the radio on, then press the screen
where the time is displayed.
2. Press the “User Clock” button on the touch-
screen or the time display (Navigation radio
only).
3. To adjust the hours, press either the “Hour
Forward” or “Hour Backward” button on the
touchscreen.
4. To adjust the minutes, press either the “Min-
ute Forward” or “Minute Backward” button
on the touchscreen.
5. To save the new time setting, press the
screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
Menu
• Push the MENU button on the faceplate to
access the System Setup menu and the My
Files menu.
• Push the MENU button on the faceplate in an
active mode (SAT, CD, AUX, etc.) to change
mode specific settings.
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
Audio Control Menu
• Push the AUDIO button on the faceplate on
the right side of the radio.
• Use either the “arrow” buttons on the touch-
screen or the sliders to adjust BASS, MID,
and/or TREBLE.
• Press the “BAL/FADE” button on the touch-
screen and use either the “arrow” buttons on
the touchscreen or the cross-hair to change
Balance and Fade. The “Center” button on
the touchscreen resets the settings.
Audio Control Menu
177
Display Settings
• Push the MENU button on the faceplate and
press the “Display Settings” button on the
touchscreen to access the Display Settings
menu.
• Select the “Daytime Colors” button on the
touchscreen to switch to manual daytime
mode and to adjust the brightness of the
display using daytime colors.
• Select the “Nighttime Colors” button on the
touchscreen to switch to manual nighttime
mode and to adjust the brightness of the
display using nighttime colors.
• Select the “Auto Color Mode” button on the
touchscreen to switch to automatic daytime/
nighttime mode and to control the brightness
of the display using the dimmer switch of the
vehicle.
• Press the “Exit” button on the touchscreen to
save your settings.
Display Settings
MULTIMEDIA
178
Radio Operation
Radio Operation
1 — Radio Tuner Tabs
2 — Individual Presets
3 — Search/Browse
4 — Radio Station/Track Info
5 — Sort Presets
6 — Station Scan
7 — Seek Down
8 — Direct Tune
9 — Seek Up
179
• To access Radio Mode, push the RADIO but-
ton on the left side of the faceplate, then press
the “AM,” “FM” or “SAT” button on the
touchscreen to select the band.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the “SEEK UP” or “SEEK DOWN” but-
tons on the touchscreen to seek through radio
stations in AM, FM, or SAT bands. Hold either
seek button to bypass stations without
stopping.
Store Radio Presets Manually
1. Select the radio band by pressing either the
“AM,” “FM,” or “SAT” button on the
touchscreen.
2. Find the station to store by either pressing
the “SEEK UP” or “SEEK DOWN” buttons
on the touchscreen, pressing the “Scan”
button on the touchscreen, or by using the
“Direct Tune” button on the touchscreen
3. Once the desired station is found, press and
hold one of the “PRESETS” buttons on the
touchscreen in the list to the right, until the
preset key flashes and the station text on the
button on the touchscreen changes.
NOTE:
If the Presets are not visible on the right side of
the screen, press the “PRESETS” button on the
touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA
180
CD/DVD Disc Operation
CD/DVD Disc Operation
1 — Media Source Tabs
2 — Folder/Track
3 — Open Folder
4 — Track Information
5 — Sort Tracks
6 — Track Scan
7 — Seek Down
8 — Play/Pause
9 — Seek Up
181
• Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate to
display the media source tabs at the top of the
screen. Select the source by pressing the
“HDD,” “DISC,” “AUX,” or “VES” media
source button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
Your Touchscreen Radio will usually automati-
cally switch to the appropriate mode when
something is first connected or inserted into the
system.
Insert A CD/DVD Disc
• To insert a disc, push the LOAD button on the
faceplate.
• With the printed side upwards, insert the disc
into the disc slot of the radio. The radio pulls
the disc in automatically and closes the flip
screen. The radio selects the appropriate
mode after the disc is recognized, and starts
playing the first track. The display shows
“Reading...” during this process.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Push the SEEK UP or SEEK DOWN buttons
on the faceplate to seek through tracks in Disc
Mode. Holding the SEEK UP button on the
touchscreen will fast forward through the
track until the beginning of the track is
reached; if still held it will fast-forward
through the next sequential track(s) (if ran-
dom play mode is not active) until released.
Holding the SEEK DOWN button on the
touchscreen will fast-reverse through the
track until the beginning of the track is
reached; if still held it will fast-reverse through
the next sequential track(s) (if random play
mode is not active) until released.
Audio Jack Operation
The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to con-
nect a portable audio device, such as an MP3
player or an iPod, to the vehicle’ s sound system.
This requires the use of a 3.5 mm stereo audio
patch cable.
• Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate then
the “AUX” button on the touchscreen to
change the mode to auxiliary device if the
Audio Jack is connected, allowing the music
from your portable device to play through the
vehicle's speakers.
NOTE:
The functions of the portable device are con-
trolled using the device itself, not the buttons
on the radio. However , the volume may be con-
trolled using the radio or portable device.
MULTIMEDIA
182
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Operation
• The Hard Disk Drive (HDD) mode gives you
access to the audio files on the internal hard
disk drive. It functions similar to a CD player ,
with the exception that the internal HDD can
hold more tracks.
• It is also possible to import display pictures to
the internal hard disk drive. The pictures can
be displayed on the right half of the radio
screen.
• Before using the HDD mode, you will need to
copy songs and pictures to the internal hard
drive. Songs and pictures can be added to the
hard drive by using a CD or USB device (e.g.
thumb drive or memory stick).
NOTE:
• HDD supports only .jpg/JPEG formats for pho-
tos.
• WMA/MP3 Files and selective songs from a
CD can also be added to the HDD. See the
Uconnect Owner’ s Manual Supplement for
more information.
Copying Music From CD
1. Push the LOAD button on the faceplate.
2. Insert a disc, then push the MY FILES but-
ton on the faceplate. Select the “MY MU-
SIC” button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “Add Music Files to HDD” button
on the touchscreen, then press the “Disc”
button on the touchscreen in the next screen
to start the process.
NOTE:
• You might need to select the folder or title
depending on the CD, then press “DONE” to
start the copy process.
• The copy progress is shown in the lower left
corner of the screen.
Copying Music From USB
1. The USB port on the radio face plate allows
you to copy files to your hard drive. To ac-
cess, lift up on the cover.
2. Insert a USB device (e.g. thumb drive or
memory stick), then select the “MY MUSIC”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “Add Music Files to HDD” button
on the touchscreen, then press the “Front
USB” button on the touchscreen in the next
screen.
4. Select the folders or titles you would like to
copy, then press the “SAVE” button on the
touchscreen to start the copy process.
Copying Music From CD
Copying Music From USB
183
5. To copy all of the titles, press the “ALL”
button on the touchscreen then press the
“SAVE” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
The copy progress is shown in the lower left
corner of the screen.
Copying Pictures To The HDD
1. Insert either a CD or a USB device contain-
ing your pictures in JPEG format.
2. Push the MY FILES button on the faceplate.
3. Press the “My Pictures” button on the
touchscreen to get an overview of the cur -
rently stored images, then press the “Add”
button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “Disc” or “USB” button on the
touchscreen, then select the folders or pic-
tures you wish to copy to the HDD. Use the
“PAGE” buttons on the touchscreen to page
through the list of pictures.
5. Press the desired pictures or press the “All”
button on the touchscreen for all pictures.
Confirm your selections by pressing the
“SAVE” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
The copy progress is shown in the lower left
corner of the screen.
Display A Picture On The Radio Screen
• Once the import is complete, the pictures will
then be available in the “MY PICTURES”
screen.
• Push the MY FILES button on the faceplate,
then press the “My Pictures” button on the
touchscreen. Press the desired picture, press
the “Set as Picture View” button on the touch-
screen and then press the “Exit” button on
the touchscreen. Lastly push the MENU but-
ton on the faceplate and press the “Picture
View” button on the touchscreen to display
the chosen picture on the radio screen.
NOTE:
• A check mark in the My Pictures screen indi-
cates the currently used picture.
• You can also delete pictures by pressing the
“Delete” button on the touchscreen.
Playing Music From The HDD
• Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate to
display the media source tabs at the top of the
screen. Press the “HDD” button on the touch-
screen. Press the desired track button on the
touchscreen to play or press the “SEARCH/
BROWSE” button on the touchscreen to
search by artist, by album, by song, by genre,
from a folder, or from Favorites.
Copying Pictures To The HDD
Playing Music From The HDD
MULTIMEDIA
184
Cleaning Your Touchscreen Radio
• If necessary, use a dry micro fiber lens clean-
ing cloth dampened with a cleaning solution
such as isopropyl alcohol or an isopropyl alco-
hol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Always
follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions
and directions.
CAUTION!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen. Use a clean and dry
micro fiber lens cleaning cloth to clean the
touchscreen.
Garmin Navigation
• Uconnect 430N integrates Garmin’ s
consumer -friendly navigation into your ve-
hicle. Garmin Navigation includes a database
with over six million points of interest.
• Press the “NA V” button in the upper right
corner of the touchscreen to access the Navi-
gation system.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Program a destination.
2. While traveling on your route, press the up-
per left area of the map screen where your
next turn is displayed.
3. The navigation system will then repeat the
distance to your next turn.
4. While the navigation system is speaking, use
the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust
the volume to a comfortable level. Please
note the volume setting for Navigation Voice
Prompt is different than the audio system.
NOTE:
For your own safety and the safety of others, it is
not possible to use certain features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Browsing Music From The HDD
Garmin Navigation
185
Main Navigation Menu
Finding Points Of Interest
1. From the main Navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Points of Interest” button on
the touchscreen.
2. Select a category , then a subcategory, if
necessary.
3. Select your destination and press the “Go”
button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
1. From the main navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen.
Next, press the “Points of Interest” button
on the touchscreen then press the “Spell
Name” button on the touchscreen.
2. Enter the name of your destination.
3. Press the “Done” button on the
touchscreen.
4. Select your destination and press the “Go”
button on the touchscreen.
Entering A Destination Address
• From the main navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then
press the “Address” button on the touch-
screen.
• Follow the on-screen prompts to enter the
address, then press the “Go” button on the
touchscreen.
Setting Your Home Location
• From the main navigation menu, press the
"Tools" icon. Select the "My Data" folder icon,
and then select "Set Home Location."
• You may enter your address directly, use your
current location as your home address, or
choose from recently found locations.
Edit Home Location
• From the main Navigation menu press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then
press the "Tools" icon. Next, press the "My
Data" folder.
• You may enter a new address directly , use your
current location or choose from recently found
locations.
Go Home
• A Home location must be saved in the system.
From the Main Navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then
press the “Go Home” button on the
touchscreen.
Main Navigation Menu
MULTIMEDIA
186
Following Your Route
Your route is marked with a magenta line on the
map. If you depart from the original route, your
route is recalculated. A speed limit icon could
appear as you travel on major roadways.
Adding A Via Point
To add a stop between the current location and
the end destination (Via Point), you must be
navigating a route.
• Press the “back arrow” icon multiple times to
return to the main navigation menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touch-
screen, then search for the additional stop.
Select the destination you wish to add from
the given search results.
• Press the “Go” button on the touchscreen,
then press "Add as a Via Point" button on the
touchscreen and press the "Done" button on
the touchscreen.
Taking A Detour
To take a detour, you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “back arrow” icon button on the
touchscreen multiple times to return to the
main navigation menu.
• Press the “Detour” button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only
reasonable option, the device might not calcu-
late a detour.
Acquiring Satellites
The GPS Satellite strength bars indicate the
strength of your satellite reception.
• Acquiring satellite signals can take a few min-
utes. When at least one of the bars is green,
your device has acquired satellite signals.
• You may experience delays receiving satellite
signals when in areas with an obstructed view
to the sky, such as garages, tunnels, or large
cities with tall buildings.
Following Your Route
1 — Distance To Next Turn
2 — Current Location
3 — Zoom In
4 — Zoom Out
5 — Current Speed
6 — Drag Map For Different View
7 — Your Location On The Map
8 — Estimated Time Of Arrival
9 — Navigation Main Menu
187
TIPS CONTROLS AND
GENERAL INFORMATION
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The steering wheel audio controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Right Switch
• Push the switch up or down to increase or
decrease the volume.
• Push the button in the center to change
modes AM/FM/CD/SXM.
Left Switch
• Push the switch up or down to search for the
next listenable station or select the next or
previous CD track.
• Push the button in the center to select the
next preset station (radio) or to change CDs if
equipped with a CD Player.
Reception Conditions
Reception conditions change constantly while
driving. Reception may be interfered with by the
presence of mountains, buildings or bridges,
especially when you are far away from the
broadcaster.
The volume may be increased when receiving
traffic alerts and news.
Care And Maintenance
Observe the following precautions to ensure the
system is fully operational:
• The display lens should not come into contact
with pointed or rigid objects which could dam-
age its surface; use a soft, dry, anti-static cloth
to clean and do not press.
• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to
clean the display lens.
• Prevent any liquid from entering the system:
this could damage it beyond repair.
Anti-Theft Protection
The system is equipped with an anti-theft pro-
tection system based on the exchange of infor -
mation with the electronic control unit (Body
Computer) on the vehicle. This guarantees
maximum safety.
If the check has a positive outcome, the system
will start to operate. See an authorized dealer
for further information.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
MULTIMEDIA
188
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
There are many ways to play music from iPod/
MP3 players or USB devices through your vehi-
cle's sound system.
NOTE:
The remote USB port, located within the upper
glove compartment, allows you to plug an iPod
into the vehicle's sound system.
Non-Touchscreen Radios: To hear audio from
devices connected to the USB port, insert the
auxiliary cord into the AUX port.
Touchscreen Radios: To hear audio from devices
connected to the USB port, push the “MEDIA”
button on the faceplate, then press the “AUX”
or “iPod” button on the touchscreen.
When connected to this feature:
• The iPod can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod or
external devices contents.
• The iPod battery charges when plugged into
the USB port (if supported by the specific
audio device).
• Compatible iPod devices may also be control-
lable using voice commands.
NOTE:
The USB port supports certain Mini, Classic,
Nano, Touch, and iPhone devices. The USB port
also supports playing music from compatible
external USB Mass Storage Class memory de-
vices. Refer to UconnectPhone.com for a list of
tested iPods. Some iPod software versions may
not fully support the USB port features. Please
visit Apple’s website for iPod software updates.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external
device while driving. Failure to follow this
warning could result in a collision.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
(VES)
System Operation
The screen is located in the overhead compart-
ment console. To lower a screen, push the re-
lease button located in the center of the console
rear of the screen.
Remote USB Port
iPod/USB/MP3 Control
189
The system may be controlled by the front seat
occupants using either the radio or DVD player
controls, or by the rear seat occupants using the
remote control.
• To use the headphones, push the power but-
ton located on the right ear cup.
• To receive VES audio through the vehicle's
sound system, press the VES button on the
touchscreen.
Operation Of The Touchscreen Radio/DVD
Player/Blu-Ray Player
To view a DVD, push the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD
button on the faceplate and insert the disc.
Playback begins after the DVD is recognized by
the disc drive. If playback does not begin after
the disc is inserted into the touchscreen radio,
follow these steps:
Push the MENU button on the faceplate, then
press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen.
If a chapter list appears on the right side of the
screen, press the HIDE LIST button on the
touchscreen to display the Rear VES control
screen.
Operation Of The Remote Control
The remote control operates similarly to any
DVD remote you may have used before and
allows the rear seat passengers to change sta-
tions, tracks, discs and audio/video modes.
Connect the video game or other external media
devices to the AUX jacks following the color
coding for the VES jacks.
• Pushing the power button will turn the VES
system ON/OFF.
• Pushing the mode button causes the MODE
SELECTION menu to appear on the VES
screen. Use the remote control arrow buttons
to scroll through the available modes, and
then push ENTER to select the desired mode.
Auxiliary Audio/Video Input Jacks
The AUX jacks are located on the driver’ s side
rear trim panel behind the sliding door.
Connect the video game or other external media
devices to the AUX jacks following the color
coding for the VES jacks.
Using either the touchscreen radio or remote
control, select “AUX” from the REAR VES CON-
TROL or the MODE SELECTION screen.
Refer to “V ideo Entertainment System (VES)”
in the vehicle Owner's Manual for further infor-
mation.
UCONNECT PHONE
The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system
with Voice Command Capability that allows you
to dial a phone number with your mobile phone
using simple voice commands (see V oice Com-
mand section).
• To determine if your vehicle is equipped with
Uconnect Phone, push the “Uconnect
Phone” button
located on the radio
faceplate. If your vehicle has this feature, you
will hear a voice prompt. If not, you will see a
message on the radio “Uconnect Phone not
available.”
NOTE:
To access the tutorial, push the “Uconnect
Phone” button
. After the BEEP, say “tu-
torial.” Push any button on the faceplate, or
press any button on the touchscreen, to cancel
the tutorial.
• Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia”
in your Owner's Manual for further details.
MULTIMEDIA
190
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Pro-
file, Version 1.0 or higher . For Uconnect Cus-
tomer Support please visit
UconnectPhone.com. This site will provide spe-
cific instructions based on the type of mobile
phone being paired. U.S. residents please call
1-877-855-8400. Canadian residents please
call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French).
Phone Pairing
NOTE:
Pairing is a one - time initial setup before using
the phone. Prior to starting the pairing proce-
dure ensure all additional phones within the
vehicle have their Bluetooth disabled.
1. Activate Bluetooth on the mobile phone you
are pairing.
2. Push the “Phone”
button.
3. W ait for the “ready” prompt and BEEP.
4. After the BEEP, say ”setup” or “Uconnect
device setup.”
5. After the BEEP, say “device pairing.”
6. After the BEEP, say “pair a device.”
7. Follow the audible prompts.
8. You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal
Identification Number (PIN), which you will
later need to enter into your mobile phone.
You can say any four-digit PIN. Y ou will not
need to remember this PIN after the initial
pairing process.
9. You will then be prompted to give the phone
pairing a name (each phone paired should
have a unique name).
10. Next you will be asked to give this new
pairing a priority of 1 through 7 (up to
seven phones may be paired); 1 is the
highest and 7 is the lowest priority. The
system will only connect to the highest
priority phone that exists within the prox-
imity of the vehicle.
11. You will then need to start the pairing
procedure on your cell phone. Follow the
Bluetooth instructions in your cell phone
Owner's Manual to complete the phone
pairing setup.
NOTE:
Keep in mind that software updates – either on
your phone or Uconnect system – may interfere
with the Bluetooth connection. If this happens,
simply repeat the pairing process. However,
first, make sure to delete the device from the list
of phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be
sure to remove Uconnect from the list of devices
in your phone’s Bluetooth settings.
Mobile Phone Pairing
191
Phonebook
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone automatically down-
loads names (text names) and number entries
from your mobile phone’ s phonebook. Specific
Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Pro-
file may support this feature. Automatic Trans-
fer is indicated by a green arrow at the bottom of
the screen. See UconnectPhone.com for sup-
ported phones.
• Automatic download and update, if sup-
ported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wire-
less phone connection is made to the
Uconnect Phone. For example, after you start
the vehicle.
NOTE:
The mobile phone may require authorization
prior to download.
• A maximum of 1,000 entries per phone will
be downloaded and updated every time a
phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of en-
tries downloaded, there may be a short delay
before the latest downloaded names can be
used. Until then, if available, the previously
downloaded phonebook is available for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently con-
nected mobile phone is accessible.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is down-
loaded. The SIM card phonebook is not part of
the Mobile phonebook.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only
be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are
transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on
the next phone connection.
Making A Phone Call
• Push the “Phone” button .
• After the BEEP, say “dial” (or “call” a name).
• After the BEEP, say number (or name).
Receiving A Call — Accept (And End)
• When an incoming call rings/is announced on
Uconnect, push the “Phone” button
.
• To end a call, push the “Phone” button
.
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call
• During a call, push the “Voice Command”
button
.
• After the BEEP, say “mute” (or “mute off”).
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset
And Vehicle
• During a call, push the “Voice Command”
button
.
• After the BEEP, say “transfer call.”
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pushing the “Phone” but-
ton
, then adjust the volume during a
normal call.
Uconnect myPHONE
MULTIMEDIA
192
• Use the radio ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to
adjust the volume to a comfortable level while
the Uconnect system is speaking. Please note
the volume setting for Uconnect is different
than the audio system.
WARNING!
• Any voice commanded system should be
used only in safe driving conditions follow-
ing applicable laws regarding phone use.
Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in a collision causing you and others
to be severely injured or killed.
• In an emergency, to use Uconnect Phone,
your mobile phone must be:
• turned on
• paired to Uconnect Phone
• have network coverage
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’ s authority to operate the
equipment.
UCONNECT VOICE COMMAND
Voice Command Operation
The Uconnect Voice Command system allows you
to control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, HDD, Uconnect Phone, a memo recorder,
and supported portable media devices.
• When you push the “Voice Command” button
located on the radio faceplate or steer-
ing wheel, you will hear a beep. The beep is
your signal to give a command. If you do not
say a command within a few seconds, the
system presents you with a list of options. If
you ever want to interrupt the system while it
lists options, push the “V oice Command” but-
ton
, listen for the BEEP, and say your
command.
NOTE:
U.S. residents visit driveuconnect.com for more
info on which voice command features apply to
your vehicle. Canadian residents visit
driveuconnect.ca for more info on which voice
command features apply to your vehicle.
• Start a dialogue by pushing the “Voice Com-
mand” button
, you will hear a beep.
The beep is your signal to give a command.
193
Below are a list of voice commands for each of the different modes:
While In: Voice Command Example:
Main Menu
“Radio AM” (to switch to the AM radio mode)
“Radio FM” (to switch to the FM radio mode)
“Satellite Radio” (to switch to the Satellite radio mode)
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
“USB” (to switch to the USB mode)
“Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to the Bluetooth Streaming mode)
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio Mode
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Mode
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its spoken number)
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
"Channel Name" (to change the channel by its spoken name)
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
MULTIMEDIA
194
While In: Voice Command Example:
Disc Mode
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” The following are common voice commands for this
mode: “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the recording, you may push the Voice Command
button
to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:
— “Save” (to save the memo)
— “Continue” (to continue recording)
— “Delete” (to delete the recording)
— “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — During the playback you may push the Voice
Command button
to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:
— “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
— “Next” (to play the next memo)
— “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
— “Delete” (to delete a memo)
— “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
195
Voice Text Reply
If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command,
your Uconnect 430N radio may be able to play
incoming Short Message Service (SMS) mes-
sages (text messages) through the vehicle's
sound system. It also allows you to respond by
selecting from various predefined phrases.
NOTE:
Not all phones are compatible with this feature.
Refer to the phone compatibility list at
UconnectPhone.com. Connected mobile
phones must be bluetooth-compatible and
paired with your radio.
• Push the “Voice Command” button
and
after the BEEP, say “SMS” to get started.
NOTE:
To access the tutorial, push the “Voice Com-
mand” button
. After the BEEP, say “tu-
torial.” Push any button on the faceplate or
press any button on the touchscreen to cancel
the tutorial.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be
used only in safe driving conditions following
applicable laws regarding phone use. Your
attention should be focused on safely oper-
ating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result
in a collision causing you and others to be
severely injured or killed.
MULTIMEDIA
196
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are
vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want
you to be happy with our products and services.
W arranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. W e strongly recommend that you take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer . They know
your vehicle the best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an autho-
rized dealer service manager first. Most matters
can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer's
customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's cus-
tomer center should include the following infor -
mation:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• V ehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• V ehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
Fax: (787) 782-3345
197
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficul-
ties, the manufacturer has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center . Any hearing
or speech impaired customer , who has access to
a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in
the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties
that require assistance can use the special
needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For
TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
manufacturer stands behind only the manufac-
turer's service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer's service contract, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification
Card in the mail within three weeks of the
vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions
about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er's Service Contract National Customer Hotline
at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-
9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any ser-
vice contract that is not the manufacturer's ser-
vice contract. It is not responsible for any service
contract other than the manufacturer's service
contract. If you purchased a service contract that
is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you
require service after the manufacturer's New V e-
hicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person
listed in those documents.
W e appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major invest-
ment in facilities, tools, and training to assure
that you are absolutely delighted with the own-
ership experience. Y ou will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or
related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion en-
gines only), some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other reproduc-
tive harm.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
198
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and rem-
edy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems
between you, an authorized dealer or
FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
V ehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to
http://www.safercar .gov; or write
to: Administrator , NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey A venue, SE., West Building,
W ashington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from
http://www.safercar .gov
.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor V ehicle Defect Investiga-
tions and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or
go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
•
You can purchase a copy of the Owner's
Manual, United States customers may visit
the Dodge Contact Us page at
www.dodge.com scroll to the bottom of the
page and select the “Contact Us” link, then
select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove Com-
partment Material” from the left menu. Y ou
can also purchase a copy by calling
1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada).
•
Replacement User Guide kits or, if you prefer,
additional printed copies of the Owner's
Manual, may be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority .com (U.S.) or by calling
1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada).
NOTE:
•
The Owner's Manual and User Guide elec-
tronic files are also available on the Chrysler ,
Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/
Service Manuals”. Then select your desired
model year and vehicle from the drop down
lists.
199
200
Accessories ..................173
Mopar ...................173
Adding Fuel ..................116
Additives, Fuel ................117
AirBag .....................78
Air Bag Operation .............79
Air Bag W arning Light ...........77
Driver Knee Air Bag ............80
Enhanced Accident Response . . .84, 146
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......146
If Deployment Occurs ...........83
Knee Impact Bolsters ...........80
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ....85
Maintenance ................85
Side Air Bags ................80
Transporting Pets .............104
Air Bag Light ............51, 77, 106
Air Conditioning ................34
Automatic Rear ...............30
Air Conditioning Filter .............36
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......35
Air Pressure
Tires ....................161
Alarm
Arm The System ..............11
Disarm The System ............12
Security Alarm ...............54
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .........171
Anti-Lock W arning Light............54
Ashtray .....................47
Audio Jack...................182
Automatic Headlights .............23
Automatic Transmission ...........108
Adding Fluid ...............172
Fluid Type .................172
Gear Ranges ...............110
AUX Cord ...................182
Auxiliary Audio/Video Input Jacks......190
Axle Fluid ...................172
Axle Lubrication ...............172
Battery......................52
Charging System Light ..........52
Jump Starting ...............140
Belts, Seat...................105
B-Pillar
Location ...............156
Brake Fluid ..................172
Brake System
Fluid Check ................172
W arning Light ................51
Bulb Replacement ..............120
Bulbs, Light ..............107, 120
Camera, Rear .................114
Capacities, Fluid ...............171
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ................151
Carbon Monoxide W arning..........105
Change Oil Indicator ..............49
Changing A Flat Tire ..........125, 152
Chart, Tire Sizing ...............153
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ......105
Checks, Safety ................105
Child Restraint .................86
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ................89
Child Seat Installation .......98, 101
How To Stow An unused ALR
Seat Belt ..................97
Infant And Child Restraints ........87
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .....94
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .91
Older Children And Child Restraints . . .88
Seating Positions ..............90
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . .103
INDEX
201
Cleaning
Wheels ...................167
Climate Control .................26
Automatic ..................26
Clock Settings.................177
Compact Spare Tire .............166
Computer, Trip/Travel .............51
Connector
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . .189
Contract, Service ...............198
Cooling System
Cooling Capacity .............171
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .171
Cruise Light ...................57
Customer Assistance .............197
Cybersecurity .................175
Daytime Running Lights .........22, 23
Defroster, Windshield ............106
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..........25
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........57
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ................22, 23
Disabled V ehicle Towing ...........145
Door Ajar ..................52, 53
Door Ajar Light...............52, 53
Doors ......................12
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .............13
E-85 Fuel ...................170
Economy (Fuel) Mode ............109
Electrical Power Outlets ............44
Electronic Speed Control
(Cruise Control) ..............111
Electronic Throttle Control
W arning Light ................53
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing V ehicle When Stuck ......143
Hazard W arning Flasher .........120
Jacking ............125, 130, 152
Jump Starting ...............140
Engine .....................151
Break-In Recommendations .......108
Compartment ...............151
Compartment Identification .......151
Coolant
(Antifreeze) ...........171
Exhaust Gas Caution ...........105
Oil .....................171
Oil Filler Cap ...............151
Oil Selection ...............171
Overheating ................142
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................84, 146
Ethanol ....................170
Exhaust Gas Cautions ............105
Exhaust System................105
Exterior Lighting ................22
Exterior Lights ...........22, 107, 120
Filters
Air Conditioning ..............36
Engine Oil .................171
Flashers
Hazard W arning ..............120
Turn Signals ...........22, 57, 107
Flash-To-Pass ...............22, 23
Flexible Fuel V ehicles
Fuel Requirements ............170
Fluid, Brake ..................172
Fluid Capacities................171
Fluid Leaks ..................107
Fluids And Lubricants ............171
Fog Lights .................22, 24
Fold-Flat Seats .................13
Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating ......14
Freeing A Stuck V ehicle ...........143
Fuel
Adding ...................116
Additives .................117
Economy Mode ..............109
Ethanol ..................170
INDEX
202
Flexible ..................170
Materials Added .............117
Octane Rating ...............171
Specifications ...............171
Tank Capacity ...............171
Fueling.....................116
Fuses ..................121, 122
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .......39
Gear Ranges..................110
Gear Selector Override ............143
General Information .............188
GPS Navigation (Uconnect GPS) ......187
Hazard W arning Flashers ..........120
Headlights....................22
Automatic ..................23
High Beam/Low Beam Select
Switch .................22, 23
Lights On Reminder ............22
Passing .................22, 23
Switch ....................22
Time Delay ...............22, 24
Head Restraints ................18
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch ....................23
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .......39
Hood Prop....................37
Hood Release ..................37
Ignition .....................10
Switch ....................10
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .................57
Display ...................48
Display Controls ..............48
Menu Items .................49
Instrument Cluster Display ..........49
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ......122
Intermittent Wipers (Delay W ipers)......25
Introduction ...................1
Inverter
Power ....................46
iPod/USB/MP3 Control............189
Jack Location .................126
Jack Operation .............125, 152
Jump Starting
.................140
Key
Fob
Arm The Alarm ...............11
Disarm The Alarm .............12
Programmable Features ..........50
Keys ........................9
Lane Change And Turn Signals ........22
Lane Change Assist ..............22
Lap/Shoulder Belts...............67
Latches ....................107
Hood .....................37
Leaks, Fluid ..................107
Life Of Tires ..................163
Liftgate .....................38
Closing ...................38
Opening ...................38
Light Bulbs ..................107
Lights .....................107
AirBag..............51, 77, 106
Automatic Headlights ...........23
Brake W arning ...............51
Bulb Replacement ............120
Cruise ....................57
Daytime Running ...........22, 23
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ......22, 23
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator ...................53
Exterior ..................107
Fog......................24
Hazard W arning Flasher .........120
Headlights .................22
203
High Beam .................23
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . .22, 23
Instrument Cluster .............22
Lights On Reminder ............22
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . .55
Park .....................57
Passing .................22, 23
Seat Belt Reminder ............53
Security Alarm ...............54
Service ...................120
Turn Signals ...........22, 57, 107
W arning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ..............53, 57
Loading V ehicle
Tires ....................156
Load Leveling System .............39
Low Tire Pressure System ...........61
Lug Nuts/Bolts ................170
Maintenance Schedule ...........147
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) ...............55
Manual
Service ...................199
Media Center (Radio) ............176
Mini-Trip Computer ..............51
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ........61
Mopar Accessories ..............173
Multi-Function Control Lever.......22, 23
Navigation ...................185
Navigation System (Uconnect GPS) . . . .186
Navigation V oice Prompt V olume ......185
New V ehicle Break-In Period ........108
Occupant Restraints ..............65
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......171
Oil Change Indicator
Reset ....................49
Oil, Engine ..................171
Capacity ..................171
Filter ....................171
Pressure W arning Light ..........53
Recommendation .............171
Viscosity ..................171
Oil Pressure Light ...............53
Onboard Diagnostic System..........57
Operating Precautions .............57
Operator
Manual
Owner's Manual ..............199
Overheating, Engine .............142
ParkSense System, Rear...........112
Personal Settings................49
Pets ......................104
Phone (Uconnect) ..............190
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . .156
Power
Inverter ...................46
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ....44
Pregnant W omen And Seat Belts.......73
Preparation For Jacking ...........129
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..................73
Radial Ply Tires ................162
Radio
Presets ...................179
Radio Frequency
General Information ..........9,11
Radio Operation ...............176
Rear Camera .................114
Rear Cross Path ................59
Rear ParkSense System ...........112
Recreational Towing .............118
Release, Hood .................37
Reminder, Lights On ..............22
Reminder, Seat Belt ..............66
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm ...............11
Disarm The Alarm .............12
INDEX
204
Replacement Bulbs .............120
Replacement Tires ..............163
Reporting Safety Defects ..........199
Restraints, Child ................86
Restraints, Head ................18
Rocking V ehicle When Stuck ........143
Safety Checks Inside V ehicle ........105
Safety Checks Outside V ehicle .......107
Safety Defects, Reporting ..........199
Safety, Exhaust Gas .............105
Safety Information, Tire ...........152
Safety Tips...................105
Schedule, Maintenance ...........147
Seat Belt Reminder ..............53
Seat Belts.................66, 105
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .........69
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Anchorage ..................69
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Belt Anchorage ...............69
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . .74
Child Restraints ..............86
Energy Management Feature .......74
Extender ...................73
Front Seat .............66, 67, 68
Inspection .................105
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .......68
Lap/Shoulder Belts .............67
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .......69
Operating Instructions ...........68
Pregnant W omen ..............73
Pretensioners ................73
Rear Seat ..................67
Reminder ..................66
Seat Belt Extender .............73
Seat Belt Pretensioner ...........73
Untwisting Procedure ...........69
Seats ....................13, 17
Adjustment .................13
Heated ....................17
Rear Folding ................13
Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor) .........14
Tilting ....................13
Security Alarm .................54
Arm The System ..............11
Disarm The System ............12
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......171
Service
Assistance ..............197
Service Contract ...............198
Service Manuals ...............199
Shift Lever Override .............143
Shoulder Belts .................67
Signals, Turn ..........22, 23, 57, 107
Snow Tires ...................165
Spare Tires .........128, 165, 166, 167
Spark Plugs ..................171
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..............171
Oil .....................171
Speed Control
Cancel ...................112
Resume ..................112
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .......111
Starting
Button ....................10
Steering
Tilt Column .................21
Wheel, Heated ...............21
Wheel, Tilt ..................21
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls...................188
Storage, V ehicle ................35
Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats .......14
Stuck, Freeing ................143
Supplemental Restraint System –
AirBag....................78
Telescoping Steering Column .........21
Tilt Steering Column ..............21
205
Time Delay
Headlight ..................22
Tips.......................188
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . .156
Tire Markings .................152
Tires ............107, 160, 165, 168
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...........163
Air Pressure ................160
Changing ..............125, 152
Compact Spare ..............166
General Information ........160, 165
High Speed ................161
Inflation Pressure .............161
Jacking ............125, 130, 152
Life Of Tires ................163
Load Capacity ...........156, 157
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) .................56, 61
Quality Grading ..............168
Radial ...................162
Replacement ...............163
Safety ................152, 160
Sizes ....................153
Snow Tires .................165
Spare Tires ..........128, 165, 167
Spinning ..................162
Tread Wear Indicators ..........163
Wheel Nut Torque ............170
Tire Safety Information............152
Tire Service Kit ................135
To Open Hood .................37
Touchscreen Radio
Cleaning Your Touchscreen Radio . . .185
Towing .....................117
Disabled V ehicle .............145
Guide ...................117
Recreational ................118
W eight ...................117
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........118
T
railer Towing .................117
Trailer Towing Guide .............117
Trailer Weight .................117
Transfer Case
Fluid ....................172
Transmission
Automatic .................108
Fluid ....................172
Transporting Pets ...............104
Tread Wear Indicators ............163
Turn Signals ................22, 57
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .........168
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Connector .................189
Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink) .................39
Universal Transmitter .............39
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .......69
V ehicle Loading ................157
V ehicle Storage .................35
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) ........189
V oice Command ...............193
V oice Prompt V olume
Navigation .................185
V oice Recognition System (VR) .......193
V olume
Navigation V oice Prompt .........185
W arning Flashers, Hazard ..........120
W arning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) ................55
W ashers, W indshield..............25
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........167
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim .........167
Window Fogging ................35
Windows.....................36
Windshield Defroster .............106
Windshield Washers ..............25
Wipers, Intermittent ..............25
INDEX
206
207
208
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road
highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in
a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
IMPORTANT
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area
of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the
applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
This guide has been prepared to help you
get quickly acquainted with your new Dodge
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference for common questions. However, it
is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions,
maintenance procedures and important
safety messages, please consult your
Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the
back cover and other Warning Labels in
your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may
apply to your vehicle. For additional
information on accessories to help
personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Dodge brand dealer.
DRIVING AND
ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most
frequent causes of collisions. Your
driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If
you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride
with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend or use
public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a
collision. Your perceptions are less
sharp, your reflexes are slower and
your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and
then drive.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the
safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, resulting in a collision and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme
caution when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as
cellular telephones, computers, portable
radios, vehicle navigation or other devices,
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous and could lead to a serious
collision. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while
the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle. Some
states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
3466448_19b_Grand_Caravan_UG_072318.indd 2 7/23/18 11:19 AM
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY
OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, MEDIA AND
WARRANTY BOOKLET BY VISITING:
WWW.MOPAR.COM/EN-US/CARE/OWNERS-MANUAL.HTML
(U.S. RESIDENTS);
WWW.OWNERS.MOPAR.CA (CANADIAN RESIDENTS).
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
Whether it’s providing information about specific
product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment,
we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your
Dodge brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your
make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search
keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special offers
tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and more. To get this information,
just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and
print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA
US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.dodge.com/en/owners
(U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on
the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the
www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the
applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
©2018 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC.
APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC.
GOOGLE PLAY STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GOOGLE.
19RT-926-AA
SECOND EDITION
2019 GRAND CARAVAN USER GUIDE
3466448_19b_Grand_Caravan_UG_072318.indd 1 7/23/18 11:19 AM
